2007 cadillac escalade/escalade esv owner manual...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 18Safety Belts ............................................ 38Child Restraints ...................................... 60Airbag System ........................................ 89Restraint System Check ....................... 106

Features and Controls .............................. 109Keys ..................................................... 111Doors and Locks .................................. 120Windows ............................................... 131Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 133Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 137Mirrors .................................................. 155OnStar® System ................................... 163Universal Home Remote System .......... 165Storage Areas ...................................... 170Sunroof ................................................ 179

Instrument Panel ....................................... 181Instrument Panel Overview ................... 184Climate Controls ................................... 212Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .. 220Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 239Audio System(s) ................................... 265

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 317Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 318Towing ................................................. 372

Service and Appearance Care .................. 389Service ................................................. 392Fuel ...................................................... 395Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 400All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 438Rear Axle ............................................. 439Front Axle ............................................ 440Headlamp Aiming ................................. 441

2007 Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual M

1Information Provided by:

Bulb Replacement ................................ 445Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 448Tires ..................................................... 450Appearance Care .................................. 492Vehicle Identification ............................. 502Electrical System .................................. 502Capacities and Specifications ................ 512

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 513Maintenance Schedule .......................... 514

Customer Assistance Information ............. 535Customer Assistance and Information ... 536Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 552

Index .......................................................... 555


GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, andthe names ESCALADE and ESV are registeredtrademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without notice.For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is ever needed while you are on the road. Ifthe vehicle is sold, leave the manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15854796 A First Printing ©2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.


Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazardis. Then we tell you what to do to help avoidor reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”


Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do tohelp avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in differentcolors or in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5


These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:


Front Seats ......................................................9Power Seats ..................................................9Power Lumbar .............................................10Heated Seats ...............................................11Heated and Cooled Seats ............................12Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ...............13Power Reclining Seatbacks ..........................15Head Restraints ...........................................17Center Seat .................................................18

Rear Seats .....................................................18Heated Seats ...............................................1860/40 Split Bench Seat (Second Row) .........19Bucket Seats (Second Row) .........................26Third Row Seat ............................................33

Safety Belts ...................................................38Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ............38Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ..............................................42How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ..............43Driver Position .............................................43Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ..................50

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...............51Right Front Passenger Position ....................51Center Front Passenger Position ..................52Rear Seat Passengers .................................53Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................56Safety Belt Pretensioners .............................59Safety Belt Extender ....................................59

Child Restraints .............................................60Older Children ..............................................60Infants and Young Children ..........................63Child Restraint Systems ...............................67Where to Put the Restraint ...........................72Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .....................................73Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ....................................82Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ........................84Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ..........................85

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems


Airbag System ...............................................89Where Are the Airbags? ...............................92When Should an Airbag Inflate? ...................95What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ....................97How Does an Airbag Restrain? ....................98What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ....................................................98Passenger Sensing System ........................100

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .....104Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .........................105Restraint System Check ..............................106

Checking the Restraint Systems .................106Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ..........................................107

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems


Front Seats

Power Seats

The power seat controls are located on theoutboard side of the front seats.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushionby moving the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushionby moving the rear of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

The power reclining seatback control is locatedbehind the power seat control on the outboardside of the seats. See Power Reclining Seatbackson page 15.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. See MemorySeat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13.Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control,

Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown


Power Lumbar

The controls used to operate the power lumbarfeature are located on the outboard side ofthe seats.

• To increase lumbar support, press and holdthe front of the control.

• To decrease lumbar support, press and holdthe rear of the control.

• To raise the height of the support, press andhold the top of the control.

• To lower the height of the support, press andhold the bottom of the control.

Let go of the control when the lower seatbackreaches the desired level of support.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. See MemorySeat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for moreinformation.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.


Heated Seats

If the front seats havethe heated seat feature,the buttons used tocontrol this feature arelocated on the climatecontrol panel.

+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only theseatback, press the top button with the heatedseatback symbol.

This symbol will appear on the climate controldisplay to indicate that the feature is on. Pressthe button to cycle through the temperaturesettings of high, medium and low and to turnthe heated seatback off. Indicator bars next tothe symbol designate the level of heat selected:three for high, two for medium, and one for low.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat theentire seat, press the bottom button with theheated seat and seatback symbol.

This symbol will appear on the climate controldisplay to indicate that the feature is on. Pressthe button to cycle through the temperaturesettings of high, medium and low and to turnthe heated seat off. Indicator bars next tothe symbol designate the level of heat selected:three for high, two for medium, and one for low.

The heated seats will be canceled ten secondsafter the ignition is turned off. If you want touse the heated seat feature after you restart thevehicle, you will need to press the appropriateheated seat button again.

If your vehicle has heated and cooled seats,see Heated and Cooled Seats on page 12.


Heated and Cooled Seats

If the front seatshave the heated andcooled seat feature,the buttons usedto control this featureare located on theclimate control panel.

{ (Cooled Seat): To cool the entire seat, pressthe button with the cooled seat symbol.

This symbol will appear on the climate controldisplay to indicate that the feature is on. Pressthe button to cycle through the temperaturesettings of high, medium and low and to turnthe cooled seat off. Indicator bars next tothe symbol designate the level of cooling selected:three for high, two for medium, and one for low.

+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback,press the button with the heated seatback symbol.

This symbol will appear on the climate controldisplay to indicate that the feature is on. Press thebutton to cycle through the temperature settingsof high, medium and low and to turn the heatedseatback off. Indicator bars next to the symboldesignate the level of heat selected: three for high,two for medium, and one for low.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat theentire seat, press the button with the heated seatand seatback symbol.

This symbol will appear on the climate controldisplay to indicate that the feature is on. Pressthe button to cycle through the temperaturesettings of high, medium and low and to turnthe heated seat off. Indicator bars next tothe symbol designate the level of heat selected:three for high, two for medium, and one for low.

The heated and cooled seats will be canceled afterthe ignition is turned off. If you want to use theheated and cooled seat feature after you restartyour vehicle, you will need to press the appropriateseat button again.


Memory Seat, Mirrors, and PedalsYour vehicle has the memory package.

The controls for thisfeature are located onthe driver’s door panel,and are used to programand recall memorysettings for the driver’sseat, outside mirrors,and the adjustablethrottle and brakepedal feature if yourvehicle has it.

To save your positions in memory, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, andthe throttle and brake pedals to a comfortableposition.

See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors onpage 160 and Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 141 for more information.Some mirrors might not function with thememory feature.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps soundthrough the driver’s front speaker to let youknow that the position has been stored.

A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brakepedal position can be programmed by repeatingthe above steps and pressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, the vehicle mustbe in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1or button 2 corresponding to the desired drivingposition. The seat, outside mirrors, and adjustablethrottle and brake pedals will move to the positionpreviously stored. You will hear a single beep.


If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter toenter your vehicle and the remote recall memoryfeature is on, automatic seat, mirror, and adjustablepedal movement will occur. See “MEMORY SEATRECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 254 for more information.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls,memory buttons, power mirror buttons, oradjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/orthe adjustable pedals while recalling a memoryposition, the driver’s seat and/or the adjustablepedals recall may stop working. If this happens,press the appropriate control for the area thatis not recalling for two seconds, after theobstruction is removed. Then try recalling thememory position again by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your GM dealer for service.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature is located on thedriver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit positioncan be recalled by pressing the exit button.You will hear a single beep. The driver’s seatwill move back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), automatic seatmovement will occur when the key is removedfrom the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 254 formore information.

Further programming for the memory seat featurecan be done using the DIC. You can select ornot select the following:

• The automatic easy exit seat feature

• The remote memory seat recall feature

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization on page 254.


Power Reclining Seatbacks The controls for the power reclining seatback arelocated on the outboard side of the front seatsbehind the power seat control.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of thecontrol rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the topof the control forward.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control,Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown


{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

CAUTION: (Continued)


The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either.In a crash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicleis in motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13.


Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the releasebutton (A), located onthe top of the seatback,while you push thehead restraint down.

The front seats may have head restraints thatalso tilt forward and rearward.

To tilt the head restraint, grasp the top of therestraint while pressing the button (B), locatedon the right hand side of the head restraint, andmove it forward or rearward until the desiredlocking position is reached. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The second row seats may have head restraintsthat can be adjusted up and down, but they donot tilt.


Center SeatYour vehicle may have a front center seat. Theseatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for the driver and passenger when thecenter seat is not used. Do not use it as a seatingposition when the seatback is folded down.

For information on safety belts for this position,see Center Front Passenger Position on page 52.

Rear Seats

Heated Seats

The rear seats havethe heated seat feature,the buttons used tocontrol this feature arelocated on the RearSeat Audio (RSA) panel.

M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion,press the button with the heated seat symbol.

A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSAdisplay to indicate that the feature is on. Press thebutton to cycle through the temperature settingsof high, medium, and low, and to turn it off.

Driver’s Side RSAHeated Seat Button

Only shown


Indicator bars next to the symbol will designatethe level of heat selected: three for high,two for medium, and one for low.

The heated seats will be canceled ten secondsafter the ignition is turned off. If the vehicleis restarted, the heated seat button will need tobe pressed again to restart the feature.

60/40 Split Bench Seat(Second Row)If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s)can be folded for additional cargo space orfolded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to thethird row seats, if your vehicle has them. Theseseats will have either the manual fold and tumblefeature or the automatic seat release fold andtumble feature.

Manual Fold and Tumble FeatureFolding and Tumbling the Seat(s)To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in

front of, or on the seat.Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side ofthe seat, to release the seatback.


The seatback will fold forward automatically.Leaving the seatback in this position createsa flat load floor.If the seatback cannot fold flat, try movingthe front seat forward and/or put the frontseatback in the upright position.

3. Lift the same leveragain to releasethe rear of theseat from the floor.The seat willtumble forward.


Returning the Seat(s) to the SittingPositionTo return the seat to the sitting position, do thefollowing:

1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.The seatback cannot be raised if the seat isnot latched to the floor.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward.Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

3. Make sure the safety belt in the centerseating position is not caught between thetwo seats and is not twisted.


Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) fromthe Third Row Seats

{CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position whilethe second row is folded, or folded andtumbled, could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return the seatto the passenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows,if your vehicle has them, do the following:

1. Make sure that there is nothing under,in front of, or on the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage tothe seat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rearof the second row seat(s) on the inboardside, to release the seatback. The seatbackwill fold forward.

3. Lift the same lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor. The seatwill tumble forward automatically.


Automatic Release Fold andTumble FeatureThe transmission must be in PARK (P) for thisfeature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

{CAUTION:

Automatically folding and tumbling theseat when someone is sitting in the seat,could cause injury to the person sittingthere. Always make sure there is noone sitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.

To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:1. Make sure that there is nothing under,

in front of, or on the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat orthe safety belts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to their normal stowedposition before folding a rear seat.

2. From the frontseats, press oneof the automaticseat release buttonslocated on theoverhead console.

When accessing the third row seats, if yourvehicle has them, from the outside of thevehicle, press the button on the panel behindeither rear door.One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.

Overhead ConsoleButtons shown,

Panel Button similar




{CAUTION:



{CAUTION:


3. Make sure that the safety belt in the centerseating position is not caught between thetwo seats and is not twisted.


Folding and Tumbling the Second RowSeat(s) from the Third Row Seats orOutside

{CAUTION:


To fold and tumble the seat from the third rowseats, if your vehicle has them, do the following:

1. Make sure that there is nothing under,in front of, or on the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Press the automaticseat release buttonlocated on thepanel behind therear doors.

One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.

Driver’s Side Rear PanelButton shown


Bucket Seats (Second Row)If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbackscan be reclined, the seats can be folded foradditional cargo space, or folded and tumbledfor easy entry and exit to the third row seats,if your vehicle has them. These seats will haveeither the manual fold and tumble feature orthe automatic seat release fold and tumble feature.

Reclining SeatbacksTo recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the lever located on the outboard sideof the seat.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.


To return the seatback to an upright position,do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressureto the seatback and the seatback will returnto the upright position.

{CAUTION:



Manual Fold and Tumble FeatureFolding and Tumbling the Seat(s)To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in

front of, or on the seat.Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side ofthe seat, to release the seatback.


The seatback will fold forward. Leaving theseatback in this position creates a flatload floor.If the seatback cannot fold flat, try movingthe front seat forward and/or put the frontseatback in the upright position.

3. Lift the lever againto release the rearof the seat fromthe floor. The seatwill tumble forward.




3

{CAUTION:



Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from theThird Row Seats

{CAUTION:



1. Make sure that there is nothing under, infront of, or on the seat.



2. Lift the lever, locatedon the bottom rearof the second rowseat on the inboardside, to releasethe seatback.The seatback willfold forward.

3. Lift the lever again to release the rear ofthe seat from the floor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Release Fold and TumbleFeatureThe transmission must be in PARK (P) for thisfeature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

{CAUTION:

Automatically folding and tumbling theseat when someone is sitting in the seat,could cause injury to the person sittingthere. Always make sure there is noone sitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.

To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in

front of, or on the seat.



2. From the frontseats, press oneof the automaticseat release buttonslocated on theoverhead console.

When accessing the third row seats, if yourvehicle has them, from the outside of thevehicle, press the button on the panel behindeither rear door.One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.



{CAUTION:



Overhead ConsoleButtons shown


Folding and Tumbling the Second RowSeat(s) from the Third Row Seats orOutside

{CAUTION:



1. Make sure that there is nothing under, infront of, or on the seat.


2. Press the automaticseat release buttonlocated on thepanel behind therear doors.

One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.

Driver’s Side Rear PanelButton shown


Third Row SeatIf the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s)can be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled,or removed from the vehicle.

Folding the Seatback(s)To fold the seatback, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate to access the controlsfor the seat.

2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.


3. Lift the release lever,located on the bottomrear of the seatbackon the outboardside of the seat,and the seatbackwill fold forward.


Unfolding the Seatback(s)To return the seatback to the upright position,do the following:


2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks intothe upright position.

{CAUTION:



Tumbling the Third Row SeatThe seat can be tumbled forward for additionalcargo space.

To tumble the seat, do the following:


2. Make sure the head rests are completelylowered, there is nothing under, in front of,or on the seat, and all items are removedfrom the cupholder and storage bin, if theseat is a two-passenger seat.

3. Fold the seatbacks forward using theinstructions listed under “Folding theSeatbacks” previously. You will not beable to unlatch the seat from the floorunless the seatback is folded down.


4. Unlatch the seat fromthe floor by lifting thelever located nextto the carrying handleon the rear of theseat near the bottom.

5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place.7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure

it is locked.

Put the seat in this position only when necessaryfor additional cargo space.

Returning the Third Row Seat from aTumbled PositionTo return the seat to the normal seating position,do the following:1. Open the liftgate to access the controls

for the seat.2. Make sure there is nothing that could become

trapped under the seat.

3. Release the seat from the tumbled position bylifting the lever located next to the carryinghandle at the bottom rear of the seat.


5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into theupright position.

{CAUTION:




Removing the Third Row SeatTo remove the seat, do the following:


2. Fold the seatback forward using theinstructions listed under “Folding theSeatbacks” previously. The seat cannot beremoved unless the seatback is folded.

3. Unlatch the seatfrom the floor bypulling the carryinghandle, locatedat the rear ofthe seat, rearward.

4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is atrack in the floor to guide the seat wheelsout of the vehicle.

Installing the Third Row SeatTo install the seat, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate to access the rear ofthe vehicle.

2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into thetrack on the floor and roll the seat forward.The front latches should lock into place.If the latches do not lock, try tilting the rearof the seat upward slightly.

3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down onthe seat to engage the rear floor latches.

{CAUTION:

A seat that is not locked into placeproperly can move around in a collisionor sudden stop. People in the vehiclecould be injured. Be sure to lock the seatinto place properly when installing it.


4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it islocked into place. The seatback cannot beraised to the upright position unless the seatis secured to the floor.

5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into theupright position.

{CAUTION:



{CAUTION:


7. Make sure the safety belts are returned tothe original position over the seatbacks.


Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearinga safety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injuredor killed. Do not allow people to ride inany area of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safety belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has alight that comes onas a reminder tobuckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 223.


In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will bea bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.


Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.


The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...


or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle andget out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and willbe in most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they workwith safety belts — not instead of them.Every airbag system ever offered for salehas required the use of safety belts. Even ifyou are in a vehicle that has airbags, you stillhave to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.


Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drivefar from home, why should I wearsafety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 60 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 63. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.


3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 59.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 50.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.


The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slideunder the lap belt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly outof the retractor.


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltis buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.



A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder atall times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.



A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.


To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce the effectiveness of thesafety belt in a crash.

To move it down,squeeze the buttons (A)on the sides of theheight adjuster andmove the height adjusterto the desired position.

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.After you move the adjuster to where you want it,try to move it down without squeezing the buttonsto make sure it has locked into position.


Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protectthe mother. When a safety belt is worn properly,it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 43.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.


Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someonecan sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way asthe lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isnot long enough, see Safety Belt Extenderon page 59.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.


Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted canbe thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And theycan strike others in the vehicle who are wearingsafety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the beltacross you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.


2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the wayand start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 59.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slideunder the lap belt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries.


The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly outof the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.


Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the second row seat and the third row,if your vehicle has one. Here is how to install acomfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. For the second row, remove the guide fromits storage clip on the interior body.

Second Row


If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guidefrom its storage pocket on the side of the seat.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic cord must be under the belt.Then, place the guide over the belt, andinsert the two edges of the belt into theslots of the guide.

Third Row


3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.


4. Buckle, position, and release the safetybelt as described in Rear Seat Passengerson page 53. Make sure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guides. Slide the guide into itsstorage pocket.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are located on the retractorpart of the safety belts. They help the safetybelts reduce a person’s forward movement in amoderate to severe frontal, near frontal, rearor side crash, or a rollover.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activatein a crash, you will need to get new ones,and probably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 107.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. It is free. When yougo in to order it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will be long enough foryou. To help avoid personal injury, do not letsomeone else use it, and use it only for the seatit is made to fit. The extender has been designedfor adults. Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.For more information, see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seatthat has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs.It should never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or canbe thrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.


Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outsideposition, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. If the child is sitting in thesecond row center position, move the childtoward the safety belt buckle. In eithercase, be sure that the shoulder belt still is onthe child’s shoulder, so that in a crash thechild’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide. See Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 56. If the child isso small that the shoulder belt is still very closeto the child’s face or neck, you might wantto place the child in a rear seat that has alap belt, if your vehicle has one.


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that hasa lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder partis behind the child. If the child wearsthe belt in this way, in a crash the childmight slide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, theyneed to use a child restraint.


{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesnot weigh much — until a crash. During acrash a baby will become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it. For example, in a crashat only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)baby will suddenly become a 240lb (110 kg)force on a person’s arms. A baby shouldbe secured in an appropriate restraint.


{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.


For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If itis, the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint, state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant’s body,the back and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.


{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones,as it should. Instead, it may settle uparound the child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on a body areathat is unprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious or fatalinjuries. Young children always should besecured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.


A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.


A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat canalso help a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint systemis a portable one, which is purchased bythe vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,an add-on child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. With built-in or add-onchild restraints, the child has to be securedwithin the child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint,be sure the child restraint is designed tobe used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have alabel saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards. Then follow theinstructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraintitself or in a booklet, or both.


Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installedin the vehicle using the vehicle’s safetybelt or LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 73 formore information. A child can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is not properly securedin the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,and to this manual. The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place ofhip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder strapsthat are attached to a flat pad which rests lowagainst the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-typeshield has straps that are attached to a wide,shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.


Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. General Motors recommends thatchild restraints be secured in a rear seat, includingan infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, achild riding in a forward-facing child seat and anolder child riding in a booster seat.Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition. The restraints will not work properly.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.


Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)Your vehicle has the LATCH system. TheLATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicleand attachments on the child restraint thatare made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be attached using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tetheranchors. Your child restraint may have lowerattachments and a top tether.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.


Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.


Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the lawrequires that forward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether be attached.In the United States, some child restraints alsohave a top tether. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.


Second Row — 60/40

Second Row — Bucket




For models with a three passenger third row seat,see the information following for installing achild restraint with a top tether in the third row,if your vehicle has one. Never install two toptethers using the same top tether anchor.

For models with 60/40 second row seating, therear right side passenger and center seatingpositions have exposed metal anchors locatedin the crease between the seatback and theseat cushion.

For models with second row bucket seats, bothrear seating positions have exposed metal anchorslocated in the crease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.

Third Row — TwoPassenger

Third Row — ThreePassenger


For models with bucket second row seating, thetop tether anchors are located at the bottom rear ofthe seat cushion for each seating position in thesecond row. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

For models with 60/40 second row seating, thetop tether anchors are located at the bottom rear ofthe seat cushion for each seating position in thesecond row. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Second Row Seat — Bucket Second Row Seat — 60/40


For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat,there is one top tether anchor located at thebottom rear of the seat cushion that can be usedfor the rear driver side seating position in thethird row. Never install two top tethers using thesame top tether anchor.

For vehicles with a three passenger third rowseat, there is one top tether anchor located atthe bottom rear of the seat cushion that canbe used for either the third row center or driverside seating position. Never install two top tethersusing the same top tether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger position or the third row passenger sideseating position if your vehicle has a third rowseat, if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be attached, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that thetop tether must be attached. There is no place toattach the top tether in these positions.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 72for additional information.

Third Row Seat — Two or Three Passenger


Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint willnot be able to protect the child correctly.In a crash, the child could be seriouslyinjured or killed. Make sure that aLATCH-type child restraint is properlyinstalled using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.


{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint that thereis no contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safety beltssecured, may cause damage to the safety beltor the seat. When removing the child restraint,always remember to return the safety belts totheir normal, stowed position before foldingthe rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments

on the child restraint to the loweranchors.


2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if the vehicle has one. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraint andyou are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead rest/restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest/restraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead rest/restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise the headrest/restraint and routethe tether under thehead rest/restraint andin between the headrest/restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.


Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 73.

If your vehicle has a third row, there is no toptether anchor in the passenger-side seatingposition. Do not secure a child restraint in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that thetop tether must be anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push downon the child restraint as you tighten the belt.


6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, and theposition that you are using has a top tetheranchor, attach and tighten the top tether tothe top tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 73.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will move freelyagain and be ready to work for an adult or largerchild passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killedby the right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always betterto secure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in this position.The restraints will not work properly.


Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag. A rear seat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 72.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraint orbooster seat is detected. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 100 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 225 for more information onthis including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint. See Power Seatson page 9.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 73.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that thetop tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 73if the child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s

frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 100. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat,even if the airbag is off. If your child restraintis forward-facing, move the seat as far back asit will go before securing the child restraint inthis seat. See Power Seats on page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 225.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.


4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.


6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not beable to pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be litand stay lit when the key is turned to RUNor START.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.


If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbucklethe vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back allthe way. The safety belt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or largerchild passenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driverand a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle also has roof-mounted rolloverairbags designed for either side impact or rolloverdeployment. Roof-mounted rollover airbags areavailable for the driver and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver and for the right frontpassenger and the passenger seated directlybehind that passenger.

For roof-mounted rollover airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag coveringon the ceiling above the sidewall trim near thedriver’s and right front passenger’s window andthe second row outside seating positions.

Also, if your vehicle has a third row passengerseat, you may have third row roof-mountedrollover airbags.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of an inflatingfrontal airbag. But these airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job and comply withfederal regulations.


Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killedin a crash if you are not wearing yoursafety belt — even if you have airbags.Wearing your safety belt during a crashhelps reduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver andright front passenger are designed todeploy in moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crashes. They are notdesigned to inflate in rollover, rearcrashes, or in many side crashes.



And, for some unrestrained occupants,frontal airbags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than moreforceful airbags have provided in the past.

Roof-mounted rollover airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the sideof your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover,or in a severe frontal impact. They arenot designed to inflate in rear crashes.If your vehicle has roof rail airbags,they are designed to provide both sideimpact protection and rollover protection.Everyone in your vehicle should weara safety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.


{CAUTION:

Both frontal and roof-mounted rolloverairbags inflate with great force, fasterthan the blink of an eye. If you are tooclose to an inflating airbag, as you wouldbe if you were leaning forward, it couldseriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for airbag inflationbefore and during a crash. Always wearyour safety belt even with frontal airbags.The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. Occupants should not leanon or sleep against the door in the first orsecond row seats, or the rear windowsin the third row seat, if your vehicle hasroof- mounted rollover airbags.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 60 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 63.

Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door in the first or second rowseats, or the rear windows in the third rowseat, if your vehicle has roof-mountedrollover airbags.


There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 224 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.


The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The roof-mounted rollover airbag for the driverand the person seated directly behind the driveris located in the ceiling above the side windows.


The roof-mounted rollover airbag for the right frontpassenger and the person directly behind thatpassenger is located in the ceiling above theside windows.

If your vehicle has a third row seat, theroof-mounted rollover airbag is located in theceiling above the rear windows for the outsidepassenger positions.


{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything onthe steering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted rollover airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tiedownthrough any door or window opening.If you do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. Butthey are designed to inflate only if the impactexceeds a predetermined deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds take into account avariety of desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflateand help restrain the occupants. Whether yourfrontal airbags will or should deploy is not basedon how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impactand how quickly your vehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle is equipped withelectronic frontal sensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between a moderate frontalimpact and a more severe frontal impact. Formoderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflateat a level less than full deployment. For moresevere frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.


If the front of your vehicle goes straight into awall that does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about 9 to16 mph (14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold levelfor a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph(29 to 40 km/h). (The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that itcan be somewhat above or below this range.)

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an object that does notdeform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole)the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

The frontal airbags (driver and right frontpassenger) are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

Your vehicle has a seat position sensor whichenables the sensing system to monitor thefore and aft position of the driver’s seat. Seatposition sensors provide information that is usedto determine if the airbags should deploy at areduced level or at full deployment.

Your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbagsand a rollover sensor. See Airbag System onpage 89. These “rollover capable” airbagsare intended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes, during a rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. A roof-mounted rollover airbag will inflateif the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold level canvary with specific vehicle design. Roof-mountedrollover airbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-mounted rollover airbagswill deploy when either side of the vehicle is struckor during a rollover, or in a severe frontal impact.


In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, theangle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down. For roof-mounted rollover airbags,inflation is determined by the location and severityof the impact or a rollover event.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See Off-Road Driving on page 334 for tips onoff-road driving.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. In the case of a roof-mounted rolloverairbag, the sensing system detects that thevehicle is about to roll over or has been in asevere frontal impact. The sensing system triggersa release of gas from the inflator, which inflatesthe airbag. The inflator, airbag, and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules insidethe steering wheel and in the instrument panelin front of the right front passenger. For vehicleswith roof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbagmodules are located in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

If your vehicle has a third row seat withroof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbag modulesare located inside the rear-most pillar trim andabove in the ceiling above the fixed rear glass.


How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.The airbag supplements the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’supper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not helpyou in many types of collisions, including manyfrontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is nottoward the airbag. Airbags should never beregarded as anything more than a supplementto safety belts, and then only in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal collisions for thedriver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags,and only in moderate to severe side collisionsfor roof-mounted rollover airbags.

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rolloverairbags deflate more slowly and may still be atleast partially inflated minutes after the vehiclecomes to rest. Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for a short time. Thesecomponents include the steering wheel hub for thedriver’s frontal airbag and the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.For vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags,the ceiling of your vehicle near the side windowsmay be hot. The parts of the bag that comeinto contact with you may be warm, but not toohot to touch. There will be some smoke and dustcoming from the vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver fromseeing out of the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it stop people fromleaving the vehicle.


{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there is dust inthe air. This dust could cause breathingproblems for people with a historyof asthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the vehicleshould get out as soon as it is safe todo so. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicle afteran airbag inflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors and turn the interior lampson when the airbags inflate. You can lock thedoors again and turn the interior lamps off byusing the door lock and interior lamp controls.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for your airbag system.If you do not get them, the airbag systemwill not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts.The service manual for your vehicle coversthe need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collectionand Event Data Recorders on page 547.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can meanthat your airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.


Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theoverhead console will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to RUN or START. The wordsON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,will be visible during the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, either the wordON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 225.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. General Motors recommends that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, including aninfant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a childriding in a forward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

United States Canada


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seatas far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s airbag if:

• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied

• the system determines that an infant is presentin a rear-facing infant seat

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat

• a right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time

• the right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints

• or if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s airbag, the off indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.


If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint following the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 85.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sairbag anytime the system senses that a personof adult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and body build. Everyonein your vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is not sitting properly in theseat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and askthe person to place the seatback in the fully uprightposition, then sit upright in the seat, centered on theseat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about two minutes. Thiswill allow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.


{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of thefrontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 224 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.


Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not usingseat covers or other aftermarket equipment ifyour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 105 for more informationabout modifications that can affect how thesystem operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someoneis working on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 553.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned off and the battery isdisconnected, an airbag can still inflateduring improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.




They are probably part of the airbagsystem. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualifiedto do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.

If you have any questions about this, youshould contact Customer Assistance beforeyou modify your vehicle. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistanceare in Step Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 536.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, rollover sensormodule, instrument panel, steering wheel,ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,roof-mounted rollover airbag modules, orairbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 536.


Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job,have it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 496 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.)

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the side impact airbag covering on theceiling near the side windows, the airbag maynot work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel,both the airbag module and the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbag,or side impact airbag module and ceilingcovering for roof-mounted rollover airbags.Do not open or break the airbag coverings.


Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systems areworking properly after a crash, havethem inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new beltsor LATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched,as they would be if worn during a more severecrash, then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the airbags inflate you will also need to replacethe driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the airbags have not deployed.The driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 224.


✍ NOTES


Keys .............................................................111Remote Keyless Entry System ...................112Remote Keyless Entry System

Operation ................................................113

Doors and Locks .........................................120Door Locks ................................................120Power Door Locks ......................................121Delayed Locking .........................................122Programmable Automatic

Door Locks .............................................122Rear Door Security Locks ..........................122Lockout Protection ......................................123Liftgate/Liftglass ..........................................124Power Liftgate ............................................126Power Running Boards ...............................130

Windows ......................................................131Power Windows .........................................132Sun Visors .................................................133

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................133Content Theft-Deterrent ..............................133PASS-Key® III+ ..........................................135PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..........................135

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..........137New Vehicle Break-In .................................137Ignition Positions ........................................138Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ..............139Starting the Engine .....................................139Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ...........141Engine Coolant Heater ...............................141Automatic Transmission Operation ..............142Tow/Haul Mode ..........................................148Parking Brake ............................................149Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................150Shifting Out of Park (P) ..............................151Parking Over Things That Burn ..................152Engine Exhaust ..........................................153Running the Engine While Parked ..............154

Mirrors ..........................................................155Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror with Intellibeam™, OnStar®,Compass, and Temperature Display .........155

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature Display ........................157

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ................160

Section 2 Features and Controls


OnStar® System ...........................................163Universal Home Remote System .................165

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation ................................................166

Storage Areas ..............................................170Glove Box ..................................................170Cupholder(s) ...............................................170Center Console Storage Area .....................171Assist Handles ...........................................171

Garment Hooks ..........................................171Luggage Carrier .........................................172Rear Storage Area .....................................173Rear Seat Armrest .....................................173Convenience Net ........................................173Cargo Cover ..............................................174Cargo Management System .......................176

Sunroof ........................................................179

Section 2 Features and Controls


Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.


Your vehicle has adouble-sided keythat can be used forthe ignition anddoor locks.

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will beable to assist you with obtaining replacements.

In an emergency contact Cadillac RoadsideService®. See Roadside Service on page 541for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment.


At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any remote keylessentry system. If the transmitter does not work orif you have to stand closer to your vehicle forthe transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacementis necessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 113.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlockedfrom about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m)away with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature you canalso start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter.The RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,provides an increased operating range of 195 feet(60 m) away. However, the operating range maybe less while the vehicle is running. As a result,you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turnit off than you were to start it.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry System on page 112.


You will have one of the RKE transmitters below.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has thisfeature, it may be started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” following for more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash onceto indicate locking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn will chirp when thelock button is pressed again within five secondsof the previous press of the lock button. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 254 foradditional information. Pressing the lock buttonmay arm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 133.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. Ifenabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 254.Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitterwill disarm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 133.

With Remote Startand Power Liftgate

and Liftglass(Without Remote

Start Similar)

With Remote Startand Power Liftgate

and Liftglass(Without Remote

Start Similar)


m (Liftglass): Press and hold this button onthe RKE transmitter to open the liftglass.

& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this buttonon the RKE transmitter to open and close theliftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime willsound to indicate when the liftgate is openingand closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm.The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarmwill turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to preventanother transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your GM dealer. Rememberto bring any additional transmitters so they canalso be re-coded to match the new transmitter.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.The vehicle can have a maximum of eighttransmitters matched to it.


Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theRKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 245 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch any of the circuitry.Static from your body transferred to thesesurfaces may damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in this type of RKEtransmitter do the following:1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into the

notch, located above the metal base, andseparate the bottom half from the top halfof the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing up. Usea type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.Make sure the cover is on tightly, so waterwill not get in.


4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter withthe vehicle.

To replace the battery in this type of RKEtransmitter do the following:

1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,located below the trunk release button, andseparate the bottom half from the top half ofthe transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water willnot get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether tightly so moisture does not get in.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter withthe vehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle. It may also start upthe vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normal operation ofthe system will return after the key is turned tothe RUN position.

If your vehicle has an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start, the climate controlsystem will default to a heating mode duringcolder outside temperatures and a coolingmode during warmer outside temperatures.


If your vehicle does not have an automatic climatecontrol system, during remote start the climatecontrol system will turn on at the setting the vehiclewas set to when the vehicle was last turned off.

Laws in some communities may restrict the useof remote starters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using the remote startto have the vehicle in view when doing so.Check local regulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,provides an increased range of operation.However, the range may be less while the vehicleis running. As a result, you may need to becloser to your vehicle to turn it off, than youwere to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry System on page 112 for additionalinformation.

/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lockbutton and then press and hold the remotestart button to start the vehicle.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button untilthe turn signal lights flash. If you can notsee the vehicle’s lights, press and hold theremote start button for at least four seconds.The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing theremote start button again after the vehiclehas started will turn off the ignition.When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the vehicleis running.

3. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.Remote start can be extended one time.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,and the engine is still running, turn the key tothe RUN position to drive the vehicle.


If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any ofthe following:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The vehicle can be remote started two separatetimes between driving sequences. The enginewill run for 10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine run time by another10 minutes within the first 10 minute remotestart time frame, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button and then theremote start buttons are pressed again afterthe vehicle has been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing the engine torun for 15 minutes.

The additional ten minutes are considered asecond remote vehicle start.

Once two remote starts, or a single remote startwith one time extension has been done, thevehicle must be started with the key.

After the key is removed from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remote started if the keyis in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or ifthere is an emission control system malfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remotevehicle start if the coolant temperature gets toohigh or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. The system maybe enabled or disabled through the DIC. See“REMOTE START” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 254 for additionalinformation.


Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealerto add the manufacturer’s remote vehiclestart feature.

If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,your RKE transmitter will have extended rangethat will allow you to lock or unlock your vehiclefrom approximately 197 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofa moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.




• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter throughan unlocked door when you slowdown or stop your vehicle. Lockingyour doors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlockyour vehicle.

From the outside, use the remote keylessentry (RKE) transmitter or the key in thedriver’s door.

From the inside, use the power door locks ormanual door locks. To lock or unlock the doorwith the manual locks, push down or pull up onthe manual lock knob.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with theunlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.


Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with the power lock switchor the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitterand a door or the liftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last door is closed. Youwill hear three chimes to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature and immediately lock allthe doors.

This feature will not operate if the key is inthe ignition.

You can program this feature using theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DELAYDOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customizationon page 254.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle has an automatic lock/unlock featurewhich enables you to program the vehicle’spower door locks. You can program this featurethrough the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 254 formore information on DIC programming.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks.These prevent passengers from opening therear doors from the inside.


The rear door securitylocks are located onthe inside edge ofeach rear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.The label depicting lockand unlock positionsis located near the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless

entry transmitter, if the vehicle has one,the power door lock switch, or by liftingthe rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you from locking the key inthe vehicle when the key is in the ignition anda front door is open.

If the driver’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the driver’s door is open and thekey is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver’s door will unlock.

If the passenger’s side power door lock switchis pressed when the front passenger’s door isopen and the key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the front passenger’sdoor will unlock.

Security Lock Labelshown


Liftgate/Liftglass

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftglass or liftgate open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.If you must drive with the liftglass orliftgate open, or if electrical wiring orother cable connections must passthrough the seal between the body andthe liftglass or liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedwith the recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 212.



• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open themall the way.

• If your vehicle is equipped with apower liftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust on page 153.

See Power Liftgate on page 126 for moreinformation on how to use the power liftgate.

To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch or press the door unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice.See Remote Keyless Entry System Operationon page 113.


To open the liftglass, press the button on theunderside of the license pocket applique (A).The liftglass can also be opened by pressing theliftglass release button on the RKE.

To open the entire liftgate, press the power liftgaterelease button on the RKE or in the vehicle.See Power Liftgate on page 126. You can alsopress the touchpad on the underside of the liftgatehandle (B). The liftgate will open after a slightdelay. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to openthe liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the pull cupor pull strap as an aid.

The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if therear wipers are in motion. Attempting to open theliftgate or liftglass while the rear wipers are inmotion will cause the release of the liftglassor liftgate to delay until the wipers are parked offthe liftglass.

Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electriclatch. If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftglass and liftgate will not open.The liftglass and liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected and hasadequate voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass stillwill not function, your vehicle should be takento a dealership for service.


Power LiftgateYour vehicle has a power liftgate. The vehiclemust be in PARK (P) to power open or closethe liftgate.

The liftgate must be completely closed to poweropen or completely open to power close.

The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound atthe beginning of each power operation cycle.

{CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught inthe path of the power liftgate. Make surethere is no one in the way of the liftgateas it is closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such asa garage door, you could break the liftgateglass. Always check to make sure the areaabove the liftgate is clear before opening it.

To open and close the liftgate, press and hold thepower liftgate button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate startsmoving. Press the RKE button a secondtime during liftgate operation to reverse thatoperation. See Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 113 for more information.

The liftgate can also beopened and closed bypressing the powerliftgate button on theoverhead console.Press the button asecond time duringliftgate operation toreverse that operation.

The liftgate can be power opened by pressingthe touchpad switch on the liftgate handle.Press the button a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse that operation.

Power Liftgate Buttonon Overhead Console


The liftgate can be power closed by pressingthe power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.Press the button a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse that operation.The power liftgate my be temporarily disabledunder extreme high or low temperatures.If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operatedmanually. The power liftgate may not operateunder low battery conditions.If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P)while the power function is in progress, theliftgate power function will continue to completion.If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) andaccelerate before the power liftgate latches closed,the liftgate may reverse to the open position.

Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed and latched beforeyou drive away.

If you power open the liftgate and the liftgatesupport struts have lost pressure, the lights willflash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will holdopen temporarily, then slowly close. See yourdealer for service before using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection FeaturesIf the liftgate encounters an obstacle during apower open or close cycle, a warning chime willsound and the liftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or open position.After removing the obstruction, the liftgate maybe power opened or closed normally. If the liftgateencounters multiple obstacles on the samepower cycle, the power function will deactivate,and the liftgate will switch to manual operation.The REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message inthe Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicatethat the liftgate is open. After removing theobstructions, manually open the liftgate to thefull open position or close the liftgate to the fullyclosed and latched position. The liftgate willnow resume normal power operation.

Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch


Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on theside edges of the liftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the vehicle body andpresses against this sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again or closed manually.

Manual Operation of Power Liftgate

To change the liftgateto manual operation,toggle the switch on theoverhead console tothe “Disable” positionindicated by a circle.

With the power liftgate disabled and the doorunlocked, the power liftgate can be manuallyopened and closed.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on thehandle on the outside of the liftgate, and liftthe gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pullcup or pull strap to lower the liftgate and close.The liftgate latch will power cinch to closedposition. Always close the liftgate before driving.

If the RKE button or the power close button onthe liftgate is pressed while power operationis disabled, the lights will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

When driving with the liftgate open, the powerliftgate should be switched to manual liftgateoperation — the overhead console switch set tothe “Disable” position.

Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electriclatch. If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftglass and liftgate will not open.The liftglass and liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected and hasadequate voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass stillwill not function, your vehicle should be taken toa dealership for service.


{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftglass or liftgate open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If you must drive with the liftglass orliftgate open, or if electrical wiring orother cable connections must passthrough the seal between the body andthe liftglass or liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedwith the recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 212.



• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open themall the way.

• If your vehicle is equipped with apower liftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust on page 153.

Do not drive with the liftgate open if at all possible.


Power Running BoardsYour vehicle may have power running boards.These make getting into and out of thevehicle easier.

The power running boards activate when eitherdoor on the driver’s or passenger’s side isopened or closed. They automatically extendfrom beneath the vehicle on the side in whichthe door has been opened. Once the dooris closed, the running boards will automaticallymove back under the vehicle. The vehiclemust be stationary for the running boardsto extend or retract.

The switch used todisable the powerrunning boards islocated on the centerconsole below theclimate control system.

The running boards cannot be disabled in theextended position.


Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.


Power Windows

The power windowcontrols are locatedon each of theside doors.

The driver’s door has a switch for the passengerand rear windows also. The power windows workwhen the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORYor RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 139.

Press the switch to lower the window.

Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raisethe window.

Express-Down WindowsThe driver and front passenger windows have anexpress-down feature that allows the windows tobe lowered without holding the switch. Press downfully on the window switch, then release, to activatethe express-down mode. The express-down modecan be canceled at any time by pulling up onthe switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The window lockoutswitch is located with the power window switcheson the driver’s door armrest. This feature preventsthe passenger windows from operating, except fromthe driver’s position. Press the switch to turn on thelockout feature. An indicator light will come on toshow the lockout feature is on. To turn the featureoff, press the switch again and the indicator lightwill go off.

Driver’s Side shown


Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to block glare. Detachthe sun visor from the center mount and slide italong the rod from side-to-side to cover the driveror passenger side of the front window. Swingthe sun visor to the side to cover the side window.It can be moved along the rod from side-to-sidein this position also.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors onboth the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors.Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror coverto turn the lamps on.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothingwe put on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle has a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

This is thesecurity light.

To activate the theft-deterrent system, do thefollowing:1. Open the door.2. Lock the door with the remote keyless

entry (RKE) transmitter. The securitylight should come on and stay on.

3. Close all doors. The security light shouldgo off after about 30 seconds. The alarmis not armed until the security light goes off.


If a locked door is opened without using the RKEtransmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur.The horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If thedoor is not unlocked by pressing the unlock buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter duringthe ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off.The headlamps and parking lamps will flashfor two minutes, and the horn will sound for30 seconds, then will turn off to save the batterypower. You can choose different feedback optionsfor the alarm. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 239 Driver Information Center (DIC).

Remember, the theft-deterrent system will notactivate if you lock the doors with a key, the manualdoor lock, or the power door lock switch. It activatesonly if you use the RKE transmitter. You shouldalso remember that you can start your vehicle withthe correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent

system, the vehicle should be locked with thedoor key after the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.Unlocking a door any other way will set offthe alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off thealarm by pressing the unlock button on theRKE transmitter. The alarm will not stop if youtry to unlock a door any other way.

Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s

window and open the driver’s door.2. Activate the system by locking the doors with

the RKE transmitter.3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait

for the security light to go out.4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the

door with the manual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off the alarm.

While the alarm is set, the power door unlockswitch will not work.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 503.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlampsdo not flash, the vehicle should be servicedby your dealer.


PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.




Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoderin your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrentsystem. This means you do not have to do anythingspecial to arm or disarm the system. It works whenyou transition the key to RUN, ACCESSORY orSTART from the OFF position.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel comes on when trying tostart the vehicle, the key may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 503.


If the engine still does not start with the other key,your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle doesstart, the first key may be faulty. See your dealerwho can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to“learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keys maybe programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that iscut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new additional key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, key inthe ignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the keyto OFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed andturn it to the RUN position within five secondsof removing the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.


Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform betterin the long run if you follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) orless for the first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one constant speed,fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During thistime your new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get newbrake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See Towing a Trailer on page 375 forthe trailer towing capabilities of yourvehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and loadcan be gradually increased.


Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition switch to fourdifferent positions.

A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You willonly be able to remove the key when the ignitionis turned to LOCK.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off.

Notice: Lengthy operation of features such asthe radio in the accessory ignition position andthe RUN position may drain the battery andprevent your vehicle from starting. Do notoperate your vehicle in the accessory ignitionposition for a long period of time.

C (RUN): This is the position for driving. It is theposition the switch returns to after the enginestarts, and you release the key.

D (START): This position starts the engine.


Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power(RAP) feature which will allow certain features onyour vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutesafter the ignition key is turned to LOCK.

The radio, power windows, and if equipped, thesunroof and OnStar® System, will work whenthe ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from RUN to LOCK,these features will continue to work for up to10 minutes or until a door is opened.

Starting the EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — that is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only whenyour vehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turnthe ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects the electricalsystem. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking until the vehicle starts or untilit exceeds the maximum cranking time allowed,approximately 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage,this system also prevents cranking if theengine is already running. The engine crankingcan be stopped by turning the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY or LOCK.


Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the cranking motorand drain the battery. Waiting about 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow the cranking motorto cool down, will prevent damage due tooverheating.

2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds,push the accelerator pedal all the way tothe floor, while you hold the ignition key inSTART. When the engine starts, let go ofthe key and let up on the accelerator pedal.Wait about 15 seconds between each try.

When starting your engine in very cold weather(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turnthe ignition key to START and hold it thereup to 15 seconds. When the engine starts,let go of the key.

2. If your engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for aboutthree seconds. When the engine starts, letgo of the key and accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops again, do thesame thing, but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to workwith the electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.


Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.This feature is designed for shorter drivers,since the pedals can not move farther awayfrom the standard position, but can move towardthe driver for better pedal reach.

The feature will not operate when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R) or while using the cruise control.

The switch used to adjust the pedals is locatedon the center console below the climate controlsystem.

Press the right and left arrows to move the pedalseither closer or further from your body.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. See MemorySeat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for moreinformation.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), useof the coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.


To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, nearthe power steering fluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Automatic Transmission OperationYour vehicle has a Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatictransmission, and has an electronic shiftposition indicator within the instrument panelcluster. The electronic shift position indicatordisplays when the shift lever is moved out ofPARK (P). See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 503.


There are several different positions for theshift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannotmove easily.

When parked on a hill, especially when the vehiclehas a heavy load, you may notice an increasein the effort to shift out of PARK (P). See TorqueLock (Automatic Transmission) under ShiftingInto Park (P) on page 150 for more information.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 150.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towinga Trailer on page 375.


REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 364.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engineis running at high speed is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.


DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the nextgear and has more power.

DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer,carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills,or for off-road driving. You may want to shift thetransmission to a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 333.

MANUAL MODE (M): This position lets driversselect the range of gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions. If your vehicle has this feature,see Driver Shift Control (DSC) later in this section.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, usethe brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature thatadjusts the transmission shifting to the currentdriving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshiftsand downshifts. This shift stabilization feature isdesigned to determine, before making an upshift,if the engine will be able to maintain vehicle speedby analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttleposition and vehicle load. If the shift stabilizationfeature determines that a current vehicle speedcannot be maintained, the tranmission does notupshift and instead holds the current gear. In somecases, this may appear to be a delayed shift,however the tranmission is operating normally.


Your vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shiftcontrols. Adaptive shift controls continuallycompares key shift parameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer.The transmission constantly makes adjustmentsto improve vehicle performance according tohow the vehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when temperature changes.During this adaptive shift controls process,shifting may feel different as the transmissiondetermines the best settings.

When temperatures are very cold, theHydra-Matic® 6L80 automatic transmission’s gearshifting may be delayed providing more stableshifts until the engine warms up. Shifts maybe more noticeable with a cold transmission.This difference in shifting is normal.

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Your vehicle has a Driver Shift Control (DSC).The DSC controls the vehicle’s transmission andvehicle speed while driving down hill or towinga trailer by allowing you to select a desired rangeof gears.


To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to the MANUAL MODE (M).

2. Press the plus/minus button, to upshift ordownshift selecting the desired range ofgears for your current driving conditions.

When in the MANUAL MODE (M) a number willdisplay next to the M, indicating the current gearthat has been selected. The DIC display will showthe message MANUAL SHIFT on the first line andthe current gear will be displayed on the secondline. See Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 239 and DIC Operation and Displays onpage 240 for more information. The numberdisplayed in the DIC is the highest gear that can beused. However, your vehicle can automatically shiftto lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions.

This means that all gears below that number areavailable. When FIFTH (5) is selected, FIRST (1)through FIFTH (5) gears are automatically shiftedby the vehicle, but SIXTH (6) cannot be used untilthe plus/minus button located on the steeringcolumn lever is used to change to the gear.

The transmission will prevent a gear range until aspeed that is appropriate for current drivingconditions is achieved. If shifting is prevented forany reason, the current selected gear will flashmultiple times in the DIC.

Grade Braking is not available when the Driver ShiftControl is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 148for more information.

While using the DSC, cruise control and thetow/haul mode can be used.


Tow/Haul Mode

Your vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The tow/haulmode adjusts the transmission shift patternto reduce shift cycling, providing increasedperformance, vehicle control, and transmissioncooling when towing or hauling heavy loads.

Press the button located on the end of the shiftlever to turn the tow/haul on or off. When thetow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panelcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 238 for moreinformation.

Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Traileron page 375 for more information.

The tow/haul mode works with the Autoride®

feature, if the vehicle has this, to enhance theride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle.See Autoride® on page 374.

Grade BrakingGrade Braking assists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains the vehicle’s speed byautomatically implementing a shift schedule thatuses the engine and the transmission to slowthe vehicle. This reduces wear on the brakessystem and increases control of the vehicle.The system constantly monitors the vehicle’sspeed, acceleration, throttle position, and whetherthe brake pedal is being pressed, and determineswhen to keep the current vehicle speed or toslow down. The system will then automaticallycommand downshifts that reduces the vehiclesspeed, until the brake pedal is no longerbeing pressed. This indicates the desired vehiclespeed has been reached.


The tow/haul mode and grade braking shift modescan be activated by pressing the button on the endof the shift control stalk. While in the DSC mode,grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driverto select a gear.

See Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 142 for more information.

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot. Push downthe parking brake pedal with your left foot.

A chime will activate and the warning light willflash when the parking brake is applied andthe vehicle is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h)for at least three seconds.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever,located above the parking brake pedal, with theparking brake symbol, to release the parking brake.If the ignition is on when the parking brake isreleased, the brake system warning light will go off.Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verifythat the parking brake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off before driving.If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 375.


Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 375.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)position by pulling the shift lever towardyou and moving it up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition keyin your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.


If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and the parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do notshift your transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull the shift leverout of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly beforeyou leave the driver’s seat. To find out how,see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 150.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need tohave another vehicle push yours a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parkingpawl in the transmission, then you will be able topull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system which locks the shift leverin PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK.You have to fully apply your regular brakes beforeyou can shift from PARK (P) when the ignitionis in RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operationon page 142.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever allthe way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then, move the shift lever into thegear desired.


Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is cominginto your vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.


Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running.But if you ever have to, here are some thingsto know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 153.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place thiscan happen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER parkin a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 360.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 150.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 375.


Mirrors

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with Intellibeam™, OnStar®,Compass, and Temperature DisplayYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with Intellibeam, OnStar®, compassand temperature display. For more information onOnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 163. Formore information on Intellibeam™, see “IntellibeamIntelligent High-Beam Headlamp Control System”under Exterior Lamps on page 197.

The mirror includes an eight-point compass displayin the upper right corner of the mirror face. Whenon, the compass automatically calibrates as thevehicle is driven. Outside temperature is alsoshown in the display.

Automatic DimmingYour vehicle is equipped with an inside automaticdimming rearview mirror. The automatic dimmingfeature is activated whenever the vehicle is turnedon and dims only during nighttime driving.

Compass Operation

AUTO3: Press and hold the “auto highbeam”button for approximately three seconds to turnthe compass/temperature display on or off.

When the ignition and the display features areon, the display will show two character boxes forabout two seconds. After two seconds, the mirrorwill display the compass heading and temperature.

Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds the display does not showthe correct direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, magneticnote pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

The compass can be placed in calibrationmode manually by pressing and holding the“auto highbeam” button for approximatelynine seconds until CAL is shown in thecompass display.

The mirror can then be calibrated by drivingthe vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or lessuntil the display reads the correct direction.


Compass VarianceThe mirror is set to zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass varianceif the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustthe compass variance.

Compass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted to account for zonechanges, the compass could give false readings.

To adjust for zone changes, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the “auto highbeam” buttonapproximately six seconds until a zonenumber appears in the display.

3. Once the zone number appears in the display,press the “auto highbeam” button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number. Stoppressing the button and the mirror will return tonormal operation. If C appears in the compasswindow, the compass needs calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.


Outside TemperatureOutside temperature is shown in the mirror display.Temperature will be displayed in Fahrenheit orCelsius based on the choice of English or metricin the vehicle’s configuration menu.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, please consultyour dealer. Under certain circumstances, adelay in updating the temperature is normal.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature DisplayYour vehicle has this feature. When on, theautomatic dimming mirror dims to the proper levelto minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.

The mirror has a dual display in the upper rightcorner of the mirror face that shows the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at thebottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System onpage 163 for more information about the servicesOnStar® provides.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.


Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the farleft, briefly to turn the compass/temperaturedisplay on or off.

If the display reads CAL, the compass needsto be calibrated. For more information, see“Compass Calibration” following.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius,do the following:

1. Press and hold the on/off button forapproximately four seconds until eithera flashing F or C appears.

2. Press the button again to change thedisplay to the desired unit of measurement.After approximately four seconds of inactivity,the new unit will be locked in and thecompass/temperature display will return.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, please seeyour GM dealer. Under certain circumstances,a delay in updating the temperature is normal.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turnedon automatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, dothe following:

1. Make sure the green indicator light, locatedto the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it isnot, press and hold the on/off button forapproximately six seconds until the greenlight comes on, indicating that the mirror isin automatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button forapproximately six seconds, until the greenindicator light turns off.


Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if thevehicle is outside of zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustfor compass variance. Compass variance isthe difference between earth’s magnetic northand true geographic north. If not adjusted toaccount for compass variance, the compass couldgive false readings.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Zand a zone number appears in the display.The compass is now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in the display.Release the button. After approximatelyfour seconds of inactivity, the new zonenumber will be locked in and the compass/temperature display will return.

4. Calibrate the compass as described next.


Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading, N forNorth, for example, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed inthe mirror compass windows. If CAL is notdisplayed, push the on/off button for approximately12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors

If your vehicle isequipped with outsidepower foldaway mirrors,the controls arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on thefour-way control pad to adjust the mirror.Press (A) again to deselect the mirror.


• Press (B) to select the passenger’s sidemirror. Then press the arrows located onthe four-way control pad to adjust the mirror.Press (B) again to deselect the mirror.

• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to thedriving position.

• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to thefolded position.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfoldedmanually, they may shake or flutter at normaldriving speeds and may not stay in the unfoldedposition. If this happens, you will need to resetthe mirrors. See “Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsYou will need to reset the power foldaway mirrorsif the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructedwhile folding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfoldedposition.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normaldriving speeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold andunfold them one time using the mirror controls.This will reset them to their normal position.

This mirror has the following features.

Automatic DimmingThe driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glareof the headlamps behind you. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature Display on page 157.

Curb View AssistIf your vehicle has the memory package, theoutside mirrors are able to perform the curb viewassist mirror function. This feature may be useful inallowing the driver to view the curb when parallelparking. This feature will cause the passenger’sand/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected positionwhen the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).


The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror willreturn to its original position when the vehicleis shifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignitionis turned off or to LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or off throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 239.

Heated MirrorsThe button to turn the heated mirrors on or offis located on the climate control panel. Pressthis button to warm the driver’s and passenger’soutside rearview mirrors to help clear them ofice, snow, and condensation.

See “Rear Window Defogger” under DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 212for more information.

Convex MirrorThe passenger’s side mirror may have convexglass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved somore can be seen from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharplyinto the right lane, you could hit a vehicleon your right. Check your inside mirroror glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

Your vehicle may also have a turn signal indicatoron the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flashin the direction of the turn or lane change.


OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency where we can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lock yourkeys in the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTARand they can send a signal to unlock yourdoors. If you need roadside assistance, pressthe OnStar® button and they can contactRoadside Service for you.

A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and theTerms and Conditions of the OnStar® SubscriptionService Agreement are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber Information packet locatedin your vehicle. For more information, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),or press the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, theDirections & Connections Plan is included forone year from the date of purchase. You canextend this plan beyond the first year to meet yourneeds. For more information, press the OnStar®

button to speak with an advisor.


Directions & Connections Plan• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification

• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®

subscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands at the touch of a button. Hands-FreeCalling is fully integrated into the vehicle, andmay be used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages orlinked to a cell phone through OnStar® SharedMinutes Plan. To find out more, refer to theOnStar® Owner’s Guide, visit www.onstar.comor www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar®

advisor by pressing the OnStar® button orcalling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorYour vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is afeature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that usesyour minutes to access weather, local trafficreports and stock quotes. By pressing thephone button and giving a few simple voicecommands, you can browse through the varioustopics. Customize your information profile atwww.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’sguide for more information.


OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls

Your vehicle maybe equipped with aTalk/Mute buttonthat can be used tointeract with OnStar®.

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 313for more information.

When calling into voice mail systems or to dialdirectory numbers, press the control, wait for the“number please” response, say the number(s)to be dialed, wait for the number(s) to be repeatedand then say “dial.” See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

The Universal Home Remote System, a combineduniversal transmitter and receiver, provides away to replace up to three hand-held transmittersused to activate devices such as gate operators,garage door openers, entry door locks, securitysystems, and home lighting.


If your vehicle has the Universal Home RemoteTransmitter, it complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:


2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.




Changes and modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment.

Universal Home Remote SystemOperationDo not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist you in theprogramming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section or,for assistance, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 540.


Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you are programming.When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside UniversalHome Remote buttons, releasing only whenthe Universal Home Remote indicator lightbegins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not holddown the buttons for longer than 30 secondsand do not repeat this step to program asecond and/or third hand-held transmitter tothe remaining two Universal Home Remotebuttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away fromthe Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button.Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.


5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase allof the programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codeequipped device, most commonly, a garagedoor opener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage dooropener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usuallybe found where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press andhold the programmed Universal HomeRemote button for two seconds, then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequence asecond time, and depending on the brandof the garage door opener, or other rollingcode device, repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate your rolling-code equipped device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.”You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this willerase all previous programming from theUniversal Home Remote buttons.


Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signalis being transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramminga Single Universal Home Remote Button”following this section.


Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed withStep 2 under “Programming UniversalHome Remote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 540.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling the bottom of thehandle upward. Use the key to lock and unlock.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders forthe front and rear passengers. The cupholdersare located in the center console for the frontpassengers and on the rear of the center consolefor the rear passengers. To use the frontcupholders, press down on the access doorrelease. The door will then open. Push the doorpack down to close it. The front cupholder maybe removed for cleaning by pushing downand then back on the cupholder.


To access the cupholders in the rear floor console,pull downward on the lid.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a console compartment betweenthe bucket seats.

The console has both an upper and lower storagebin accessed by lifting up on the latches locatedat the front of the console lid.

The console may be equipped with an accessorypower outlet inside. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 210.

The rear of the console also has a cupholder thatswings down for the rear seat passengers to use.

Assist HandlesYour vehicle is equipped with assist handles tobe used when getting out of the vehicle. Theyare located above the rear passenger doors.Pull down to use.

Garment HooksThere are garment hooks located on theassist handles.


Luggage CarrierIf you have the luggage carrier, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle.

The luggage carrier has siderails attached to theroof and crossrails, if equipped, which can bemoved back and forth to help secure cargo.To adjust, turn the knob located at each end ofthe crossrail counter clockwise until the crossrailcan move freely. To secure the crossrail, turnthe knob located at the end of the crossrailclockwise until tightened. Tie the load to thesiderails or siderail supports.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangsover the rear or sides of the vehicle maydamage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it restsas far forward as possible and against the siderails, making sure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 366.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as youare leaving, check now and then to make surethe luggage and cargo are still securely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.

• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof,place the load in the area over the rear wheels(behind the rear side door on extendedmodels). If you need to, cut a piece of 3/8 inchplywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderailsto spread the load. If plywood is used, tie it tothe siderail supports.

• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderailsupports. Use the crossrails only to keep theload from sliding. To move the crossrails, pullout on the latch release handle at each end.Slide the crossrail to the desired positionbalancing the force side to side. Push therelease handle back into the latched positionand slide the crossrail back and forth slightly tobe sure the latch snaps securely into place.

• If you need to carry long items, move thecrossrails as far apart as they will go. Tie theload to the crossrails and the siderails orsiderail supports. Also tie the load to thebumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly thatthe crossrails or siderails are damaged.

• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securelylocked into the siderail.


Your vehicle has a Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) located above the glassor above the rear load doors.

If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle,care should be taken not to block or damagethe CHMSL unit.

Rear Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a storage compartmentlocated in the rear cargo area of the vehicle inthe driver’s side trim panel.

To open the utility compartment, turn the knobsand swing the compartment door open. Thecompartment door can be removed.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle’s second row seat may have anarmrest/storage compartment.

Pull the loop at the top of the armrest out tolower the armrest.

To open the compartment, if equipped, push thebutton on the front of the armrest and pull thetop open.

Convenience NetThe convenience net (if equipped) in the rear ofyour vehicle helps to keep small loads in placeduring sharp turns or quick stops and starts.

The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.

To install the net, attach the hooks to theraised cargo tie downs. Then, attach the cordloops to the button retainers in the side trim.

You can unhook the net so that it will lie flatwhen you’re not using it.


Cargo Cover

{CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover could bethrown about the vehicle during a collisionor sudden maneuver. You or others couldbe injured. If you remove the cover, alwaysstore it in the proper storage location.When you put it back, always be sure thatit is securely reattached.

If you have a cargo cover, you can use it to coveritems in the cargo area of your vehicle.

To use the cover, do the following:

1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear ofthe vehicle.

2. Latch the cover posts into the retainingsockets on the cargo area trim panels.

To return the cover to the retracted position,do the following:

1. Pull up on the cover handle to release thecover posts from the retaining sockets.

2. Let the cover move forward to the fullretracted position.

To remove the cover, from a regular wheelbasemodel, do the following:

1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.

2. Then, grasping the driver’s side cover endcap,push the cover endcap toward the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out ofthe vehicle.


To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following:

1. Make sure the cover slot in the holderfaces rearward with the round surfacefacing down.

2. Then, hold the cover at an angle andplace the cover endcap into the slot inthe passenger’s side trim panel.

3. Move the other end of the cover forwardand hold it next to the driver’s side trimpanel slot.

4. Press the endcaps in, this will allow thecover to fit into the trim slot.

5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to makesure it is secure.On the extended wheelbase models thereare two cover positions. The slots furthestforward allow the cover to be used if thethird seat is removed or folded down.The cover can be installed and removedfrom either side.

Cargo Tie Downs

Your vehicle may beequipped with cargo tiedowns in the rearcargo area that allowyou to strap cargoin and keep it frommoving inside thevehicle.

When not using the tie downs, flip them down outof the way.


Cargo Management SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with a cargomanagement system. It can be used for storingand separating cargo and as a table. Themaximum load is 200 lbs. (91 kg) distributed.It is located in the rear of the vehicle on upper orlower horizontal guides. There are two verticalcurved guides that connect the upper andlower horizontal guides together. The system hasthree rollers on each side. The system will beequipped with either a release lever, located inthe middle handle, or a tab located on theside. These engage and disengage a locator pin.These are used in adjusting and positioningthe system.

The cargo management system can be positionedon the upper or lower horizontal guides.

To adjust the system from the upper guide to thelower guide, do the following:

1. Squeeze and hold the release lever, or slidethe tab towards the inside of the vehicle,to retract the locator pin.

2. Pull the system back until the front rollersreach the vertical curved guides.


3. Lower the front rollers to the lower guides andpull the system back until the middle set ofrollers clear the upper guides.

4. Lower the system until the middle rollers arelined up with lower guides. While holding inthe release lever or tab, push the systemforward until all three sets of rollers are onthe guides.

5. Release the lever or tab and push the systemuntil the locator pin reaches the locator hole.

To adjust the system from the lower guide to theupper guide, do the following:

1. Squeeze and hold the release lever, or slidethe tab towards the inside of the vehicle,to retract the locator pin.

2. Pull the system back until the middle rollerscan be raised and placed into the upperguides.

3. Push the system forward until the front rollersare lined up with the vertical curved guides.

4. Push down on the rear of the system andraise the front rollers up the vertical curvedguides.

5. Push the system forward until all three sets ofrollers are resting on the guides and releasethe lever or tab.

6. Push the system forward until the locator pinreaches the locator hole.

The cargo management system can be pulled outand used as a table on both the upper andlower guide. To use a table, squeeze the releaselever and pull the system towards you. Releasethe lever and pull the system until the locator pinreaches the next hole. The system will extendout of the vehicle. The liftgate can not be closedin this position. Do not the operate the vehiclewith liftgate open.

The cargo management system can be removedfrom the vehicle. This procedure should becompleted by two people. While squeezing therelease lever, pull the system back until therollers clear the guides.


On one side of the system is a retractablestorage area.

To access, pull the handle in the center of thesystem up.

Slide the hinge covers to the center of each side.This will keep the sides of the storage systemstationary allowing it to stay upright. Inside thesystem are two removable dividers. To remove,unhook the loops at the ends of each divider.When not in use, slide the hinge covers back andthe storage system will fold back down. Pressdown on the storage cover to lock it into place.

On the opposite side of the system aretwo cupholders.


SunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a powersliding sunroof. To open or close the sunroof,the ignition needs to be turned to ON, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must be active. WhenRAP is active, the sunroof will work for 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off, or until a frontdoor is opened. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 139 for more information.

There are two switchesin the overheadconsole that operatethe sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open thesunroof press and hold the rear of the driver’sside switch until the sunroof reaches the desiredposition. To close the sunroof, press and holdthe front of the driver’s side switch until the sunroofreaches the desired position. The sunshade willopen automatically with the sunroof, but canalso be opened manually.

When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector willautomatically raise. The air deflector will retractwhen the sunroof is closed.

Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-openthe sunroof, fully press and release the rear ofthe driver’s side switch. The sunroof will openautomatically. To stop the sunroof partway, pressthe switch a second time. To express-closethe sunroof, fully press and release the front ofthe driver’s side switch. The sunroof will closeautomatically. To stop the sunroof partway, pressthe switch a second time. The sunshade willopen automatically with the sunroof, but canalso be opened manually.


When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector willautomatically raise. The air deflector will retractwhen the sunroof is closed.

Vent: From the closed position, press the rear ofthe passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof.To stop the sunroof partway, press the switcha second time. To close the sunroof, press andhold the front of the passenger’s side switch.To stop the sunroof partway, release the switch.

Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the pathof the sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinchfeature will detect the object and stop the sunrooffrom closing at the point of the obstruction.The sunroof will then open halfway, and the airdeflector will raise. To close the sunroof onceit has re-opened, refer to the “Express-Close” or“Manual-Close” functions described previously.If the sunroof is in the vent position, and thereis an object in the path of the sunroof whenit closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroofonce it has re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close”or “Express-Close” functions described previously.


Instrument Panel Overview .........................184Hazard Warning Flashers ...........................186Other Warning Devices ..............................186Horn ...........................................................186Tilt Wheel ..................................................187Heated Steering Wheel ..............................187Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ...................188Turn and Lane-Change Signals ..................188Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ...........189Windshield Wipers ......................................190Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................191Windshield Washer .....................................192Rear Window Wiper/Washer .......................193Cruise Control ............................................194Exterior Lamps ...........................................197Headlamps on Reminder ............................202Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................202Automatic Headlamp System ......................203Fog Lamps .................................................204Instrument Panel Brightness .......................204Dome Lamps .............................................204

Dome Lamp Override .................................205Entry Lighting .............................................205Exit Lighting ...............................................205Reading Lamps ..........................................205Battery Run-Down Protection ......................205Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) .........206Accessory Power Outlet(s) .........................210Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter .................211Analog Clock ..............................................211

Climate Controls ..........................................212Dual Automatic Climate Control System ........212Outlet Adjustment .......................................217Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

and Electronic Climate Controls ................218

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ......220Instrument Panel Cluster ............................221Speedometer and Odometer .......................222Trip Odometer ............................................222Tachometer ................................................222Safety Belt Reminder Light .........................223

Section 3 Instrument Panel


Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .......223Airbag Readiness Light ..............................224Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..............225Charging System Light ...............................227Brake System Warning Light ......................228Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .......229StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..........................230Engine Coolant Temperature Gage .............230Tire Pressure Light .....................................231Malfunction Indicator Lamp .........................232Oil Pressure Light ......................................236Security Light .............................................236Fog Lamp Light ..........................................237Lights On Reminder ...................................237Cruise Control Light ...................................237Highbeam On Light ....................................237Tow/Haul Mode Light .................................238Fuel Gage ..................................................238Low Fuel Warning Light .............................239

Driver Information Center (DIC) ..................239DIC Operation and Displays .......................240DIC Warnings and Messages .....................245DIC Vehicle Customization .........................254

Audio System(s) ..........................................265Setting the Time .........................................267Radio with CD and DVD ............................268XM Radio Messages ..................................297Navigation/Radio System ............................299Rear Seat Entertainment System ................299Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ..............................310Theft-Deterrent Feature ..............................312Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................313Radio Reception .........................................314Care of Your CDs and DVDs .....................315Care of the CD and DVD Player ................315Rear Side Window Antenna .......................315XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........316Chime Level Adjustment .............................316

Section 3 Instrument Panel


✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview

United States version shown; Canada similar.


A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 217.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 188.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 221.

D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 186.

E. Shift Lever and Range Selection Mode. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation onpage 142.

F. Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 148.

G. Driver Information Center Controls. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 239.

H. Analog Clock. See Analog Clock on page 211.I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 265.J. StabiliTrak® Button. See StabiliTrak® System

on page 326. Rear Park Aid Disable Button.See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)on page 206.

K. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 187.L. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps

on page 197.M. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp

Override on page 205.N. Cruise Control Buttons. See Audio Steering

Wheel Controls on page 313.O. Horn. See Horn on page 186.P. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 313.Q. Dual Automatic Climate Controls. See Dual

Automatic Climate Control System onpage 212.

R. Pedal Adjust Button. See Adjustable Throttleand Brake Pedal on page 141. HeatedWindshield Washer Fluid Button. SeeWindshield Washer on page 192. PowerRunning Boards Disable Button (If Equipped).See Power Running Boards on page 130.

S. Glove box. See Glove Box on page 170.


Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flashon and off.

The hazard warningflasher button islocated on top of thesteering column.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatignition position the key is in, and even if thekey is not in the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the center pad on thesteering wheel.


Tilt WheelYour vehicle has a tilt wheel, that lets you adjustthe steering wheel before driving. Raising it tothe highest level gives more room to exit and enteryour vehicle.

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on thelower left side of the column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever. Then move the steering wheel to acomfortable position and release the lever to lockthe wheel in place.

Heated Steering WheelYour vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.

The button for thisfeature is located onthe left side of thesteering wheel.

Press the button to turn the heated steering wheelon or off. A light on the button will display whilethe feature is on.

The steering wheel will take about three minutesto start heating.


Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• GTurn and Lane Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 188.

• 53Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 189.

• NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wiperson page 190.

• LWindshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 192.

• 5 Rear Wiper Delay. See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 193.

• Z Rear Wiper. See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 193.

• =Rear Wiper Wash. See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 193.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way upor down. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower thelever for less than one second until the arrowstarts to flash. This will cause the turn signalsto automatically flash three times. It willflash six times if tow-haul mode is active.


Holding the turn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turn signals to flashuntil you release the lever. The lever will returnby itself when it is released.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash more quickly than normal, a signalbulb may be burned out and other drivers willnot see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs anda blown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 503.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound ateach flash of the turn signal and the messageTURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the DIC.To turn the chime and message off, move theturn signal lever to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):To change the headlamps from low to high beam,push the lever toward the instrument panel.To return to low-beam headlamps, pull themultifunction lever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this indicatorlight on the instrumentpanel cluster willalso be on.


Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen tothe windshield, gently loosen or thaw them.Damaged wiper blades may not clear thewindshield well, making it harder to see anddrive safely. If the blades do become damaged,install new blades or blade inserts. For moreinformation, see Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 448.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to preventan overload.

You control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn theband to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start.Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.If you want more wipe cycles, hold the bandon mist longer.

N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for along or short delay between wiping cycles.This can be very useful in light rain or snow.Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closerto the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping atlow speed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid band past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping,turn the band further, to the second solid bandpast the delay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the bandto off.


Rainsense™ II WipersYour vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshieldwipers. These wipers automatically turn on whena sensor, mounted next to the inside rearviewmirror, detects moisture on the windshield.When active, these wipers are able to detectmoisture on the windshield and automaticallyturn on the wipers.

To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipersmust be set to one of the five delay settings.Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivityof the rainsensor.

Since different drivers have different settingpreferences, it is recommended that the mid-rangesetting, position three, be used initially. For morewipes, select the higher settings; for fewerwipes, select the lower settings located closerto the off position on the multifunction lever.

The rainsensor will automatically control thefrequency of the wipes from off to high speedaccording to the weather conditions. The wiperscan be left in a Rainsense™ mode even whenit is not raining.

When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlampswill turn on automatically after approximatelyeight wipes. The headlamps will turn off if the wiperswitch is set to a delay position, and there havebeen no wipes for approximately three minutes, orif the wiper switch is turned to the off position.If it is dark outside, the headlamps will remain on.

Notice: Going through an automatic carwash with the wipers on can damage them.Turn the wipers off when going throughan automatic car wash.


Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the top of themultifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, push the paddle. The wipers willclear the window and then either stop or return toyour preset speed.

Heated Windshield WasherThe heated windshield washer fluid system maybe used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugsfrom your windshield.

The button is located inthe switchbank underthe climate controls.

Push the heated washer fluid button while theignition is turned on to activate the heatedwindshield washer fluid system. The indicator lightwill flash. This activation will initiate four heatedwash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cyclemay take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending onoutside temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle,it may take up to 20 seconds for each of theremaining cycles to begin. Press the button again toturn off the heated windshield washer fluid systemor it will automatically turn off after four wash/wipecycles have been completed.

When the heated windshield washer fluid systemis activated under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam may flow out of the washernozzles for a short period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.


Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The rear wiper control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to awiper position.

9 (Off): To turn the wiper off, slide the lever tothis setting.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): To turn on the rear wiperdelay, slide the lever to this setting.

Z (Rear Wiper): To turn on the rear wiper,slide the lever to this setting.

=(Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear wiperwash, push the button on the end of the turnsignal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid onthe rear window. The wipers will clear the rearwindow and either stop or return to your presetspeed. For more washer cycles, press andhold the button.

The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if theliftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate orliftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, thewiper will return to the parked position and stop.


Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, cruise controlis turned off.

If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system andbegins to limit wheel spin while you are usingcruise control, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 326.When road conditions allow you to safely use itagain, you may turn the cruise control back on.

The cruise controlbuttons are locatedon left side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): This button can both activateand turn off the system. The indicator light ison when cruise control is on and turns off whencruise control is off.


+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET − (Set): Press this button to set the speedor make the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol without erasing the set speed frommemory.

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if your parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.

2. Get up to the desired speed you want.

3. Press the SET− button located on thesteering wheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.


Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shuts offthe cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on your steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to the previousset speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo increase the cruise speed while usingcruise control:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until the desired lower speedis reached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time you do this, the vehiclewill go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the previous set cruisespeed.


Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lowergear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Of course,applying the brake takes you out of cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.

• Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights


The exterior lamps control has four positions:

9 (Off): Turn the control to this position toturn off the automatic headlamps and daytimerunning lamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again will turn theautomatic headlamps or DRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off positionwill only work when the vehicle is shifted intothe PARK (P) position.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to set the headlamps to automaticallyturn on at normal brightness, together withthe following:

• Parking Lamps


• Taillamps


; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:


• Taillamps


2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below.

• Parking Lamps


• Taillamps



IntellliBeam™ Intelligent High-BeamHeadlamp Control SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to readthis entire section before using it.

IntellliBeam™ is an enhancement to your vehicle’sheadlamp system. Using a digital light sensoron your rearview mirror, this system will turn thevehicle’s high-beam headlamps on and offaccording to surrounding traffic conditions.

The IntellliBeam™ system will turn your high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enough, there isno other traffic present, and the IntellliBeamsystem is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntellliBeam™Press and release the IntellliBeam™ button on theinside rear view mirror. The IntellliBeam™ indicatoron the mirror will turn on to let you know the systemhas been turned on. Once the system has beenturned on, it will remain on each time the vehicle isstarted. Additionally, the IntellliBeam system mustbe enabled.

To enable the IntellliBeam™ system, turn theexterior lamp control to AUTO, with the turnsignal/multifunction lever in its neutral position.The High-Beam On Light will appear on theinstrument panel cluster when the high-beamsare on. See Highbeam On Light on page 237.

Driving with IntellliBeam™IntellliBeam™ will only activate your high-beamswhen driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).

The high-beam headlamps will remain on, underthe automatic control of IntellliBeam™, until anyof the following situations occur:

• The system detects an approaching vehicle’sheadlamps.

• The system detects a preceding vehicle’staillamps.

• The outside light is bright enough thathigh-beam headlamps are not required.

• The vehicle’s speed drops below15 mph (24 km/h).


• The headlamp stalk is moved forward tothe high-beam position. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer on page 189.When either of these conditions occur, theIntellliBeam™ feature will be disabled andthe IntellliBeam™ light in the mirror will turnoff until the high-beam stalk is returned tothe neutral position.

• If IntellliBeam™ was using low-beams prior tothis action, the IntellliBeam™ feature will betemporarily disabled until the stalk is returnedto the neutral position.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to anysetting except AUTO.When this occurs, IntellliBeam™ will bedisabled until the control is turned back tothe AUTO position.

• The IntellliBeam™ system is turned off atthe inside rearview mirror.

IntellliBeam™ may not turn off the high-beams ifthe system cannot detect other vehicle’s lampsbecause of any of the following:

• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing,damaged, obstructed from view or otherwiseundetected.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered withdirt, snow and/or road spray.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detecteddue to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist or other airborne obstructions.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked orobstructed by something that blocks theview of the IntellliBeam light sensor.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice,dirt, haze or other obstructions.

• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front endof the vehicle points upward, causing theIntellliBeam sensor to aim high and not detectheadlamps and taillamps.

• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.

You may need to manually disable or cancel thehigh-beam headlamps by turning the low-beamheadlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.


Disabling and Resetting IntellliBeam™at the Rearview MirrorIntellliBeam™ can be disabled by using thecontrols on the inside rearview mirror.

AUTO3(On/Off): To disable the system,press this button on the inside rearview mirror.The IntellliBeam™ indicator will turn off and willnot come back on until the IntellliBeam™ buttonis pressed again.

Stalk Disable: When IntellliBeam™ hasturned on the high-beams, pull or push thehigh-beam stalk. This will disable IntellliBeam™.The IntellliBeam™ indicator on the mirror willturn off. To re-enable IntellliBeam™, pressthe IntellliBeam™ button on the mirror.

A different sensitivity setting is available fordealer diagnostics. This is done by pushing andholding this button for 20 seconds until theIntellliBeam™ indicator light flashes three times.If you accidentally activate this, the vehicle’ssetting will automatically be reset each time theignition is turned off and then on again.

Cleaning the IntellliBeam™ Light Sensor

The light sensor islocated on the insideof the vehicle infront of the insiderearview mirror.

Clean the light sensor window, periodically, usingglass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe thesensor window. Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the surface of the sensor window.


Headlamps on ReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chime will soundwhen your headlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on and your key is out of theignition. To turn off the chime, turn the headlampswitch to off or AUTO and then back on, orclose and re-open the door. In the AUTO mode,the headlamps turn off once the ignition is inLOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delayends (if enabled in the DIC). See “Exit Lighting”under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 254.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional DRL are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO

• The light sensor determines it is daytime

When the DRL are on, only your DRL lampswill be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and otherlamps will not be on. The instrument panelback lighting will not be on either.

When it begins to get dark, the automaticheadlamp system will switch from DRL to theheadlamps.

When you turn the headlamp switch off, theheadlamps will go off.


Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, your automaticheadlamp system will turn on the headlamps atthe normal brightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio back lighting will alsobe dimly lit.

To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turnthe exterior lamps switch to the off position.Turning off the automatic headlamp system withthe headlamp switch is not available for vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel in the defroster grillethat regulates when the automatic headlampsturn on. Be sure it is not covered, or the systemwill come on whenever the ignition is on.

The system may also turn on your headlampswhen driving through a parking garage, heavyovercast weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlampsystems so that driving under bridges or brightoverhead street lights does not affect the system.

The DRL and automatic headlamp system will onlybe affected when the light sensor sees a change inlighting lasting longer than the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it willtake approximately one minute for the automaticheadlamp system to change to DRL if it isbright enough outside. During that delay, yourinstrument panel cluster may not be as bright asusual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 204.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, turn the control to the off position.

You may be able to turn off your AutomaticHeadlamp System. See Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) on page 202 for more information.

Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit thevehicle. You can program this feature using theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 254.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when needed.


Fog Lamps

-(Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,the control is located on the exterior lamps control.The exterior lamps control is located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steering column.

Your ignition must be in the RUN position forthe fog lamps to come on.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the exterior lampsbutton. A light will come on in the instrumentpanel cluster to let you know that the fog lampsare on. Press the exterior lamps button againto turn the fog lamps off.

When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,the fog lamps also go off.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel BrightnessD (Instrument Panel Brightness): This featurecontrols the brightness of the instrument panellights.

The knob for this feature is located next to theheadlamp control.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toadjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights.Turn the knob clockwise to return the instrumentpanel cluster or radio display to full brightnesswhen the headlamps or parking lamps are on.To turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob to thefarthest clockwise position.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when a door is opened.

The dome lamps can also be turned on byturning the knob, located next to the exterior lampscontrol, clockwise to the farthest position. In thisposition, the dome lamps will remain on whether adoor is opened or closed.


Dome Lamp OverrideE (Dome Lamp Override): Press the domeoverride button, located next to the exterior lampscontrol, to keep the dome lamps off when adoor is open. To set the lamps to the automaticoperation, press the button again so that it isextended. With the button in this position,the dome lamps will come on when a dooris opened.

Entry LightingYour vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.

When the doors are opened, the dome lampswill come on if the dome override button is in theextended position. If the dome override buttonis pressed in, the lamps will not come on.

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will come onwhen you remove the key from the ignition.They will turn off automatically in 20 seconds.The lights will not come on if the dome overridebutton is pressed in.

Reading LampsIf your vehicle has reading lamps, press the buttonlocated next to the lamp to turn it on or off.

Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in otherlocations. To turn each one on or off, press thebutton located next to the lamp. The lamps cannotbe adjusted.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome lamps if theyare left on for more than 10 minutes whenthe ignition is in LOCK. This will help preventthe battery from running down.


Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA)The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)system is designed to help you park while inReverse (R). It operates only at speeds less than5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helps make parkingeasier and helps you avoid colliding with objectssuch as parked vehicles. The URPA systemdetects objects that are close to the rear of thevehicle which are at least 10 inches (25.4 cm)off the ground and below hood or trunk level.The system detects objects up to 8 feet (2.5 m)behind your vehicle. URPA determines how closethese objects are from your bumper within thisarea. Ultrasonic sensors on the rear bumper areused to detect the distance to the object.

{CAUTION:

Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assistsystem, the driver must check carefullybefore backing up. The system does notoperate above speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h).The system does not detect objects morethan 8 feet (2.5 meters) behind the vehicle.This detection distance limit may bereduced during warm weather or highhumidity. Also, the system does notdetect objects that are below your bumper,underneath your vehicle, or some objectsvery close to the vehicle. The system is notdesigned to detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.So, unless you check carefully behind yourvehicle while you are backing up, theycould be injured or killed.Whether or not you are using rear parkassist, always check carefully behind yourvehicle before backing up and then watchclosely as you do.


The display is locatednear the passenger siderear window and canbe seen by looking overyour right shoulder.

The display has three color-coded lights.The URPA lights are used to provide distanceand system information, along with beeps thatwill be heard through the speakers.

URPA can be turned offby pressing the rearpark aid disable buttonlocated next to theradio. The indicator willilluminate to indicatethat URPA is off.

The red light in the URPA display will also be litif the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). If the vehiclehas a DIC, PARKING ASSIST OFF will display.URPA automatically turns back on each timethe vehicle is started.

How the System WorksWhen the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),the rear display will briefly come on to let youknow the display is operating correctly. URPAcomes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R). The system alsodoes not work at a reverse speed greater than5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this, the red lighton the rear display will flash.

The system can be disabled using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Operationand Displays on page 240.


How the System Works when BackingIf the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detectsobjects close to the rear bumper. The first time anobject is detected a single beep will sound. If anobject is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedbetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), thefollowing describes what will occur based on yourdistance to a detected object located behind thevehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m)and 23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights(amber/amber/red) will be on.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m),a beeping sound will repeat for a short timeand all three lights (amber/amber/red) will beon and flashing.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the URPA system will not activate due to atemporary condition, the message PARKINGASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and ared light will be shown on the rear URPA displaywhen the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R).This occurs under the following conditions:

• The driver disables the system. See DICOperation and Displays on page 240.

• The parking brake pedal is depressed.

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was hanging out of yourtrunk during your last drive when you turned offthe vehicle. If the attached objects are removedfrom your vehicle before the start of your nextdrive, the system will return to normal operationunless an object is detected when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPAassumes the object is still attached, so you willhave to wait until the vehicle is driven forwardabove 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA willreturn to normal operation.


• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So,be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper freeof mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Washing Your Vehicle onpage 496. If the DIC still displays the PARKINGASSIST OFF message after cleaning thebumper and driving forward at a speed of atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer.

• Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include vibrations from ajackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck or other mechanicaldevices that interfere with URPA performance.

• When URPA is disabled without driver actionand the driver attempts to turn URPA backon using the Driver Information Center (DIC),the PARKING ASSIST ON option will not beselectable if the necessary conditions statedabove for normal system operationare not met.

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, being sureto check for other vehicles, obstructions andblind spots.

For Driver Information Center messages relatedto URPA, see DIC Warnings and Messageson page 245.

If the bumper is damaged, your URPA systemmay not work properly. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.


Accessory Power Outlet(s)With accessory power outlets you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio. The maximum capabilityof the power outlet is 20 amps.

Your vehicle will have one accessory power outletinside the floor console storage bin, one on theback of the floor console, and an additionalpower outlet in the rear cargo area on thepassenger side.

To use the power outlet, lift the spring capand insert electrical 12V device plug. To closethe power outlet, remove 12V electrical deviceplug and the spring cap will close.

Certain power accessory plugs may not becompatible to the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown adapter or vehicle fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealerfor additional information on the accessorypower plugs.

The accessory power outlets are powered, evenwith the ignition off. Continuing to use poweroutlets while the ignition is off may causethe vehicle’s battery to run down.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment. Do not use equipmentexceeding the maximum amperage rating of20 amperes.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory or accessorybracket from the plug because the poweroutlets are designed for accessory powerplugs only.


Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe front ashtray and lighter are located in thecenter console near the cupholders, if equipped.Press on the access door to open it and usethe ashtray and lighter.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it from the centerconsole. Slide it back in and push down to besure it is secure.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way,and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Analog ClockThe analog clock is located on the instrumentpanel above the radio. The clock is not connectedwith any other vehicle system and runs byitself. To adjust the clock, do the following:

1. Locate the adjustment button directly belowthe clock face.

2. Push and hold the adjustment button toadvance the clock hands. Holding thebutton down will cause the clock to advancefaster. Release the button before you getto the desired time.

3. Push and release the button to increase thetime by one minute increments until thedesired time is reached.


Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system, you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle.Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilationsystem described later in this section.

You can select different climate control settingsfor the driver and passengers.

Driver’s Side Temperature KnobThe driver’s side knob is used to adjust thetemperature of the air coming through the systemon the driver’s side. The temperature can beadjusted even if the system is turned off.This is possible since outside air will always flowthrough the system as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set to recirculation mode.See “Recirculation” later in this section.

Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwiseto lower or increase the cabin temperature.The display will show the temperature settingdecreasing or increasing.

Passenger’s Side Temperature KnobThe passenger’s side knob can be used to changethe temperature of the air coming through thesystem on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.The temperature can be adjusted even if thesystem is turned off. This is possible since outsideair will always flow through the system as thevehicle is moving forward unless it is set torecirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later inthis section.

Climate Control with Cooled andHeated Seats shown


Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwiseto lower or increase the cabin temperature.The display will show the temperature settingdecreasing or increasing.

The passenger’s temperature setting can be setto match the driver’s temperature setting bypressing the passenger power knob.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operationis active the system will control the insidetemperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire systemin automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the display willchange to show the current temperature(s)and AUTO will be lit on the display. The currentdelivery mode and fan speed will also bedisplayed for approximately 5 seconds.

When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet will be automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressor willrun when the outside temperature is overabout 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally beset to outside air. If it is hot outside, the airinlet may automatically switch to recirculateinside air to help quickly cool down yourvehicle. The light on the button will come onin recirculation.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a74°F (23°C) temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the system to regulate.Use the driver’s or passenger’s temperaturebuttons to adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 60°F (15°C), the system willremain at the maximum cooling setting.If you choose the temperature setting of90°F (32°C), the system will remain at themaximum heat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not cause the vehicleto heat or cool any faster.


Be careful not to cover the sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel near the windshield.This sensor regulates air temperature basedon sun load and also turns on your headlamps.

To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, thesystem will delay turning on the fan until warm airis available. The length of delay depends onthe engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fanswitch will override this delay and change thefan to a selected speed.

O (Off): Press the driver’s side temperatureknob to turn off the climate control system.Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and willbe directed to the floor. This direction canbe changed by pressing the mode button. Thetemperature can also be adjusted using eithertemperature knob. Press the up or down arrowson the fan switch, the defrost button, theAUTO button, driver’s side temperature knob,or the air conditioning button to turn the systemon when it is off.

Manual OperationYou may manually adjust the air delivery mode orfan speed.

y9z (Fan): The switch with the fan symbolallows you to manually adjust the fan speed.Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and thedown arrow to decrease fan speed.

Pressing this button when the system is off willturn the system on.

Pressing either arrow while using automaticoperation will place the fan in manual operation.The fan setting will display and the AUTO light willturn off. The air delivery will remain in automaticoperation.

N (Mode): Press this button to manually changethe direction of the airflow in your vehicle.Repeatedly press the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

When the system is turned off, the display will goblank after displaying the current status of thesystem.


H (Vent): This setting will deliver air to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode allows for split air tothe instrument panel outlets and to the flooroutlets. The flow can be divided between vent andfloor outlets depending upon where the knob isplaced between the settings. A little air is directedtowards the windshield and side window vents.Cooler air is directed to the upper vents andwarmer air to the floor vents.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the airto the floor outlets, with some of the air directedto the windshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets. In this mode, thesystem will automatically select Outside Air.

- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting”later in this section.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light will come on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air andodors from entering your vehicle. Recirculationmay also help cool the air inside your vehiclemore quickly once the temperature inside thevehicle is less than the outside temperature.The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,defrost, or defogging modes.

If you try to select recirculation in one of thosemodes, the indicator will flash three times and turnoff. The air conditioning compressor will alsocome on when this mode is activated. While inrecirculation mode the windows may fog whenthe weather is cold and damp. To clear thefog, select either the blend or defrost mode andincrease the fan speed. Recirculation mode canbe turned off by pressing the button again, orturning off the engine.


Air Conditioning

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning (A/C) compressor on andoff. When air conditioning is selected, an indicatorlight will come on to let you know that the airconditioning has been activated.

Pressing this button when the outside temperatureis too cool for air conditioning will make theair conditioning indicator flash three times andthen turn off to indicate the air conditioning modeis not available. If the air conditioning is onand the outside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for air conditioningto be effective, the air conditioning light willturn off to let you know the air conditioning modehas been canceled.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot inside air escape. This helps to reduce thetime it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It alsohelps the system to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to removefog or frost from the windshield more quickly.

Use the mode up and down arrows to select thedefog or defrost modes.

- (Defog): This mode directs air to thewindshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.When you select this mode, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature isclose to freezing. The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows are clear.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs a portion of theair to the windshield and side window vents andsome to the floor vents. In this mode, the systemwill automatically force outside air into your vehicle.


The recirculation mode cannot be selected while inthe defrost mode. The air conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting, unless theoutside temperature is close to freezing. Do notdrive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): The rear windowdefogger will turn off automatically after it hasbeen activated. The defogger can also be turnedoff by pressing the button again or by turningoff the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until allthe windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearviewmirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog orfrost from the surface of the mirror when therear window defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and onthe side of your instrument panel to directthe airflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,

snow, or any other obstruction (such asleaves). The heater and defroster will work farbetter, reducing the chance of fogging theinside of your windows.

• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather,press the fan up button to the maximumfan level before driving. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging the inside ofyour window.

• Keep the air path under the front seatsclear of objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout your vehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, mayaffect the performance of the heating and airconditioning system. Check with your dealerbefore adding equipment to the outside ofyour vehicle.


Rear Air Conditioning and HeatingSystem and Electronic ClimateControlsThe rear heat and air conditioning controls arepart of the rear seat audio controls located in thecenter console. The system can be controlledfrom the front controls as well as the rear controls.

To turn the system on, press the AUX button onthe front climate control system, an indicator will belit. Pressing the AUX button the first time willturn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In thismode, the airflow in the rear will be approximatelythe same direction, temperature, and fan speedas the front. Pressing the AUX button againwill turn the rear system and the indicator off.

If the rear controls are adjusted, the system willenter a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rearwill then be directed according to the settings ofrear controls. The rear system can be turned off bypressing the AUX button on the front climatecontrol system and the indicator will turn off.

If the indicator in the front AUX button is off,the rear system is off.

Rear Climate Controls with Rear Seat Audio Controls


Automatic Operation

N (Mode): Press the mode button until theAUTO setting is selected to control the insidetemperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed.AUTO will illuminate in the display when automaticoperation is active.

+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Pressthe + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe cabin temperature. The rear controltemperature display will show the temperaturesetting decreasing or increasing.

The display will only indicate climate controlfunctions when the system is in rearindependent mode.

Manual Operation

y9z (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seataudio control panel allows you to manuallyadjust the fan speed. To decrease airflow, pressthe button with the fan and down arrow symbol.Pressing the fan up button when the system is offwill turn the system on. The air delivery modewill remain under automatic control. To turn therear system off, keep pressing the button with thefan and down arrow symbol.

+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Thesebuttons select the temperature of the air flowing intothe passenger area. Press the + button for warmerair and press the − button for cooler air.

N (Mode): Press the mode button to manuallychange the direction of the airflow in your vehicle.Repeatedly press the button until the desiredmode appears on the display. Multiple presseswill cycle through the delivery selections.


Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gageson your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or isa problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know they’reworking. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there’s a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly — and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with the warninglights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 239.


Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running.You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you willneed to know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar.


Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with thedriver information center. You can set a Tripodometer. See “Trip Odometer” under DICOperation and Displays on page 240 for moreinformation.

The odometer mileage can be checked withoutthe vehicle running. Simply press the trip stemon the instrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far yourvehicle has been driven since you last set thetrip odometer to zero.

For more information see “Trip Odometer” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 240.

TachometerYour tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).


Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chimewill be provided for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driver safetybelt light will also be provided and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and lightwill be repeated if thedriver remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will come on.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 100 formore information.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUNor START, a chime will sound for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. This would only occur if the passengerairbag is enabled. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 100 for more information. Thepassenger safety belt light will also come on andstay on for several seconds, then it will flashfor several more.

This chime and lightwill be repeated ifthe passenger remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.


Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiringand the crash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbag system, seeAirbag System on page 89.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you aredriving, your airbag system may not workproperly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.


Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your overhead console has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it meansthat the right front passenger’s frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when youhave a rear-facing child restraint installedin the right front passenger’s seat, it meansthat the passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator –

United States

Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator –

Canada


Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is failsafe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 100 for more onthis, including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbag readinesslight ever come on together, it meansthat something may be wrong with theairbag system. If this ever happens, havethe vehicle serviced promptly, becausean adult-size person sitting in the rightfront passenger seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 224.


Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but the engine isnot running, as a checkto show you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running.If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with thegenerator, the generator drive belt, or anotherelectrical problem. Have it checked right away.Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

When this light comes on, the DIC will also displaythe SERVICE BATTERY NOT CHARGINGSYSTEM message. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 245 for more information.

If you must drive a short distance with the lighton, be certain to turn off all your accessories,such as the radio and air conditioner, to reducethe drain on your battery.


Brake System Warning LightWith the ignition on, the brake system warninglight will come on when you set the parking brake.If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged,a chime will sound when the vehicle speed isgreater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on and a chimesounds there could be a brake problem.Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light may also come on due to low brake fluid.See Brakes on page 429 for more information.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pulloff the road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 372.

United States Canada


{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the anti-lock brakesystem, this light willcome on when youstart your engineand may stay on forseveral seconds.

That’s normal. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. You willalso hear a chime sound when the light is onsteady. If the regular brake system warning lightis not on, you still have brakes, but you donot have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on you do not haveanti-lock brakes and there is a problem withyour regular brakes. In addition to both lights,you will also hear a chime sound on the firstoccurrence of a problem and each time thevehicle is shut off and then restarted. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 228.

The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignitionkey to RUN. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.


StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

This warning lightshould come onbriefly when theengine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem. If it stays on, or comes on whenyou are driving, there may be a problem with yourStabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may needservice. When this warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak®

system is active.

If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 326 for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage showsthe engine coolanttemperature.

If the gage pointer moves towards the shaded inthermostat, it means that your engine coolanthas overheated. If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal driving conditions, youshould pull off the road, stop your vehicle andturn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 418.


Tire Pressure Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

If equipped, a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DICmessage will accompany the light.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 450 for more information.

This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turnon solid if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 458for more information.


Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 393.


This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled as soon asit is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe todo so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place topark your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.


If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 398.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turnthe light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 395. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.(These conditions may go away once the engineis warmed up.) This will be detected by thesystem and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will requireat least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.


Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.

The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designedto evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your GM dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.


Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This light tells you ifthere could be aproblem with yourengine oil pressure.

This light will come on briefly when you startyour engine. That is a check to be sure the lightworks. If it does not come on, be sure to haveit fixed so it will be there to warn you if somethinggoes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe key toward START.The light will stay onuntil the engine starts.

See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 135 formore information.


Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamps light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 204 formore information.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Exterior Lamps on page 197 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isdisengaged. See Cruise Control on page 194 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light will come onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 189.


Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light is displayedwhen the Tow/Haulmode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Towing a Trailer onpage 375 and Tow/Haul Mode on page 148.

Fuel Gage

When the ignitionis on, the fuel gagetells you abouthow much fuel youhave left in your tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before you areout of fuel, and you should get more fuel assoon as possible.

Here are some situations you may experience withyour fuel gage. None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe fuel gage indicated. For example, thegage may have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.


Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, under thefuel gage, will comeon briefly when youare starting the engine.

This light and a chime will come on when thefuel tank is low on fuel. There will also be a“FUEL LEVEL LOW” message on the DriverInformation Center, see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 245 for more information.When you add fuel this light and message shouldgo off. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

The DIC displays information about your vehicle.It also displays warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The DIC also allows somefeatures to be customized. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 254 for more information.

All messages will appear in the DIC display locatedin the center of the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. Aftera short delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

See DIC Operation and Displays on page 240 andDIC Vehicle Customization on page 254 for thedisplays available.


DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons locatedon the instrument panel, to the right of thesteering wheel.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. A digital speedometeralso appears at the bottom of the DIC display.The digital speedometer can be enabled ordisabled. See “DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 254 formore information.

DIC Buttons

The buttons arethe trip/fuel,vehicle information,customization,and set/reset buttons.The button functionsare detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer, and transmissiontemperature.

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button todisplay the oil life, units, tire pressure readingsfor vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) systemprogramming for vehicles with a TPM system, andremote keyless entry transmitter programming.


U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 254for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km).

To switch between English and metricmeasurements, see “Units” later in this section.

Trip OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays.This display shows the current distance traveledin either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since thelast reset for the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressingthe set/reset button while the trip odometer isdisplayed.

Fuel RangePress the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km)the vehicle can be driven without refueling. Thedisplay will show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based on an averageof the vehicle’s fuel economy over recentdriving history and the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimate will change if drivingconditions change. For example, if driving intraffic and making frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if the vehicle is drivenon a freeway, the number may change eventhough the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.This is because different driving conditionsproduce different fuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces better fuel economythan city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.


Average EconomyPress the trip/fuel button until AVERAGEECONOMY displays. This display shows theapproximate average miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This numberis calculated based on the number of mpg(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menuitem was reset. To reset AVERAGE ECONOMY,press and hold the set/reset button.

Fuel UsedPress the trip/fuel button until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the lastreset of this menu item. To reset the fuel usedinformation, press and hold the set/reset buttonwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

TimerPress the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passed since the timerwas last reset, not including time the ignition is off.

Time will continue to be counted as long as theignition is on, even if another display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/reset button brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold theset/reset button while TIMER is displayed.

Transmission TemperaturePress the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMPdisplays. This display shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.


Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

Oil LifePress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,that means 99% of the current oil life remains.The engine oil life system will alert you to changeyour oil on a schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 245.You should change your oil as soon as you can.See Engine Oil on page 403. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule in this manual.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 517 formore information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE displayyourself after each oil change. It will not resetitself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed. It cannotbe reset accurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System on page 406.

UnitsPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units. All ofthe vehicle information will then be displayed inthe unit of measurement selected.

Tire PressureIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, the pressure for each tire can be viewed inthe DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).


Press the vehicle information button until theDIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information buttonagain until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa)LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 456 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 245 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes insteadof a value, there may be a problem with yourvehicle. If this consistently occurs, see yourGM dealer for service.

Relearn Tire PositionsIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, after rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the system must re-learn thetire positions. To re-learn the tire positions, seeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 458.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 463and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 245for more information.

Relearn Remote KeyThis display allows you to match remote keylessentry transmitters to your vehicle. To match aremote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle,do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEYLEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forapproximately 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at thistime, repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to LOCK.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.


DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonson the instrument panel to acknowledge thatyou received the messages and to clear themfrom the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from theDIC display because they are more urgent.These messages require action before theycan be cleared. You should take any messagesthat appear on the display seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message will display when the engine oilneeds to be changed. When you change theengine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 406 for information on how toreset the message. This message will clear itselfafter 10 seconds until the next ignition cycleor until the message is reset. See Engine Oilon page 403 and Scheduled Maintenanceon page 517 for more information.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message will display when thepressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires needto be checked. This message will also displayLEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR,or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needsto be checked. You can receive more thanone tire pressure message at a time. To readthe other messages that may have been sentat the same time, press the set/reset button.


If a tire pressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to those shown onyour Tire Loading Information Label. See Tireson page 450,Loading Your Vehicle on page 366,and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 456.The DIC display also shows the tire pressurevalues for the front and rear tires by pressing thevehicle information button. See DIC Operationand Displays on page 240. If the tire pressureis low, the low tire pressure warning light willcome on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 231.

DRIVER DOOR OPENIf the driver’s door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear, this message will displayand a chime will sound. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)TURNED OFFThis message will display when the enginecoolant becomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 230. To avoid added strain ona hot engine, the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor will turn back on. You can continueto drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your GM dealer as soonas possible to avoid damage to your engine.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OILIf your vehicle has an oil level sensor and theoil level in the vehicle is low, this messagewill display. Check the oil level and correct it asnecessary. You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition to be surethis message will clear.


This message will clear itself after 10 seconds,until the next ignition cycle. See Engine Oilon page 403 for additional information.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating on page 418 formore information.

This message will display when the enginecoolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allowthe vehicle to idle until it cools down. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 230.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 421 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating on page 418 formore information.

If the engine cooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation, this messagewill display and a chime will sound. Stop andturn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso to avoid severe damage. This messagewill clear when the engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.


ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message will display and a chime will soundwhen the cooling system temperature gets toohot and the engine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. See Engine Overheatingon page 418 for further information.

This message will also display when the vehicle’sengine power is reduced. Reduced enginepower can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is no reductionin performance, proceed to your destination.The performance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while this message is on,but acceleration and speed may be reduced.Anytime this message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your GM dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL LOWIf the fuel level is low, this message will displayand a chime will sound. Refuel as soon aspossible. See Fuel Gage on page 238 andFuel on page 395 for more information.

HOOD OPENIf the hood is not fully closed, this message willdisplay and a chime will sound. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions,and close the hood again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENIf the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear, this message willdisplay and a chime will sound. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

MANUAL SHIFT XIf your vehicle has the Range Selection Modeand the shift lever is in the MANUAL MODE (M)position, the DIC will display this message alongwith the current gear. If shifting is prevented forany reason, the currently selected gear will flashmultiple times, indicating that the transmission hasnot shifted gears. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 142 for more information.


OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 403 for more information.If low oil pressure levels occur, this messagewill display. Stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible and do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has been corrected.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.See Engine Oil on page 403.

PARKING ASSIST OFFAfter the vehicle has been started, this messagewill display to remind the driver that the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/reset button toacknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display. To turn the URPA system back on,see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)on page 206.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENIf the passenger’s door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear, this messagewill display and a chime will sound. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

REAR ACCESS OPENIf the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignitionis in RUN, this message will display and achime will sound. Turn off the vehicle and checkthe liftgate and liftglass. Restart the vehicleand check for the message on the DIC display.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message will display while you are matchinga remote keyless entry transmitter to yourvehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 113 and DIC Operationand Displays on page 240 for more information.


REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYIf a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low,this message will display. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless EntrySystem Operation on page 113.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENIf the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closedand the vehicle is in a drive gear, this messagewill display and a chime will sound. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

SERVICE AIR BAGIf there is a problem with the airbag system, thismessage will display. Have your GM dealer inspectthe system for problems. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 224 and Airbag System on page 89for more information.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMOn some vehicles, if there is a problem with thebattery charging system, this message will display.Under certain conditions, the battery warninglight may also turn on in the instrument panelcluster. See Charging System Light on page 227.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Havethe electrical system checked as soon as possible.See your GM dealer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMIf there is a problem with the brake system, thismessage will display along with the brake systemwarning light. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 228. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service as soon as possible.See your GM dealer.


SERVICE BRAKES SOONIf there is a problem with the brake system, thismessage will display. If this message appears,stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service. See your GM dealer.

SERVICE PARKING ASSISTThis message will display if there is a problemwith the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)system. Do not use this system to help you park.See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)on page 206 for more information. See yourGM dealer for service.

SERVICE STABILITRAKIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this messagedisplays, it means there may be a problem withthe StabiliTrak® system. If you see this message,try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine forat least 15 seconds; then start the engine again.

If this message still comes on, it means there isa problem. You should see your GM dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, youdo not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEMThis message will display when the Road SensingSuspension (RSS) system is not operatingproperly. Have your vehicle serviced by yourGM dealer.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message will display when there is aproblem with the theft-deterrent system. Thevehicle may or may not restart so you may wantto take the vehicle to your GM dealer beforeturning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III+Operation on page 135 for more information.


SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor(TPM) system, this message will display if a parton the system is not working properly. If youdrive your vehicle while any of the four sensorsare missing or inoperable, the warning willcome on in about 20 minutes. A sensor wouldbe missing, for example, if you put differentwheels on your vehicle without transferring thesensors. If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with the TPM.See your GM dealer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagewill display when there is a problem with thetraction control system. When this message isdisplayed, the system will not limit wheelspin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See yourGM dealer for service. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 326 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message willdisplay when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or whenthe stability control has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the fullbenefits of the stability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However,you should turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you wantto rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if youare driving in extreme off-road conditions andrequire more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 364.To turn the StabiliTrak® system on or off, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 326.


There are several conditions that can cause thismessage to appear.

• One condition is overheating, which couldoccur if StabiliTrak® activates continuouslyfor an extended period of time.

• The message will also be displayed if thebrake system warning light is on. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 228.

• The message could be displayed if the stabilitysystem takes longer than usual to completeits diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.

• If an engine or vehicle related problemhas been detected and the vehicle needsservice, the message will appear. See yourGM dealer.

• The message will also appear if the vehicleis shifted into 4LO.

The message will turn off as soon as theconditions that caused the message to bedisplayed are no longer present.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPIf the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly,this message may display along with the checkengine light on the instrument panel cluster.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 232.Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 398. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turnthis light and message off.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message will display when thesystem is re-learning the tire positions on yourvehicle. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 240 for more information. The tire positionsmust be re-learned after rotating the tires orafter replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 463,Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 458, and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 456 for more information.


TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagewill display when the traction control systemis turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System on page 326 formore information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC,you can damage the transmission. This couldlead to costly repairs that would not be coveredby your warranty. Do not drive your vehiclewith overheated transmission fluid or while thetransmission temperature warning is displayed.

If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot,this message will display along with a continuouschime. Driving with the transmission fluidtemperature high can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allowthe transmission to cool. This message willclear and the chime will stop when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

TURN SIGNAL ONIf a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km),this message will display and a chime willsound. Move the turn signal/multifunction leverto the off position.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDIf the washer fluid level is low, this message willdisplay. Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher reservoir will clear the message.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 428.

This message will clear itself after 10 seconds,until the next ignition cycle.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization featurescan only be programmed to one setting onthe vehicle and cannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.


The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle

in PARK (P).

2. Press the customization button to scrollthrough the available customizable options.

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allowsyou to change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the customization button until thePRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DIC messages inEnglish.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through thefollowing settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appearin English.

DEUTSCH (German): All messages will appearin German.

ITALIANO (Italian): All messages will appearin Italian.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appearin French.


ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when the vehicle’sdoors will automatically lock. See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 122 for moreinformation.Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle is shifted outof PARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle speed isabove 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notto turn off the automatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select which doors andwhen the doors will automatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 122for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.


DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).



REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking thevehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.You will not receive feedback when lockingthe vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter if the doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry System Operation on page 113for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on thesecond press of the lock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter, and the hornwill sound when the lock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previous command.




REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.You will not receive feedback when unlocking thevehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitterif the doors are open. See Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 113 for moreinformation.Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doors and liftgate withthe power door lock switch or the remote keylessentry transmitter and a door or the liftgate is open,this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgateuntil five seconds after the last door is closed.You will hear three chimes to signal that thedelayed locking feature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe power door lock switch or the remote keylessentry transmitter a second time. See DelayedLocking on page 122 for more information.Press the customization button until DELAY DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of thevehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door or the liftgateis closed.



EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allowsyou to select the amount of time you wantthe exterior lamps to remain on. This happensafter the vehicle is unlocked using the remotekeyless entry transmitter or if the vehicle key isturned to LOCK from RUN.Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or notto have the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter.


The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is no longeroff. See Remote Keyless Entry System Operationon page 113 for more information.


AUTO HIGH BEAMSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect to have the Intellibeam™ system turnedoff or on. See Exterior Lamps on page 197for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO HIGHBEAMS appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): The Intellibeam™ system will beturned off.

ON: The Intellibeam™ system will be turned on.



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will beset to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to aloud level.




PARK TILT MIRRORSThis feature allows you to select whether ornot the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt downwhen the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 160for more information.

Press the customization button until PARK TILTMIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilteddown when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).



EASY EXIT SEATThis feature allows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seat feature. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 formore information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recallwill occur.


ON: The driver’s seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement willonly occur one time after the key is removedfrom the ignition. If the automatic movement hasalready occurred, and you put the key back inthe ignition and remove it again, the seat will stayin the original exit position, unless a memoryrecall took place prior to removing the key again.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.


MEMORY SEAT RECALLThis feature allows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recall feature.See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals onpage 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recallwill occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will automatically moveto the stored driving position when the unlockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitteris pressed.




REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using your remote keylessentry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start”under Remote Keyless Entry System Operationon page 113 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEEDThis feature allows you to enable or disable thedigital speedometer on the DIC.

Press the customization button until DISPLAYDIGITAL SPEED appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF: The digital speedometer will be disabled.

ON (default): The digital speedometer willbe enabled.




FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factorydefault settings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the featuresettings menu.

Press the customization button until PRESS V TOEXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in theDIC display. Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning ofthe feature settings menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.


Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Drivingon page 318. By taking a few moments to readthis manual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort,as well as take advantage of its features.While your vehicle is parked, set up your audiosystem by presetting your favorite radio stations,setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.Then, when driving conditions permit, you cantune to your favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 318.


Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone, ortwo-way radio, make sure that it can be addedby checking with your dealer. Also, checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them.

Your vehicle’s systems may interfere withthe operation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functionsof your vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system. If that equipment isreplaced or additional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimes may not work.Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehiclebefore installing it. See Accessories andModifications on page 393.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 139 for more information.


Setting the Time1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob)

to enter the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET CLOCKappears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to selectSET CLOCK.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the time.

5. Press the tune/select knob to update the time.VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear onthe display.

If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured intoone of the configurable keys, pressing the key willswitch the display back to the clock set function.The time and date will always appear on the radiodisplay. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys”under Radio with CD and DVD on page 268for more information on configuring the keys.

Setting the Date1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob)

to enter the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET DATEappears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to selectSET DATE.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the date.

5. Press the tune/select knob to update thetime. VEHICLE DATE UPDATED willappear on the display.

If the DATE is configured into one of theconfigurable keys, pressing the key will switchthe display back to the date set function. The timeand date will always appear on the radio display.See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” underRadio with CD and DVD on page 268 for moreinformation on configuring the keys.


Radio with CD and DVD

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radioon and off.

Press and hold this knob for more thantwo seconds to turn off the radio, RSE videoscreen, and RSA.

n (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to select asource, either radio, CD, DVD, or auxiliary, if yourvehicle has this feature. The CD or DVD must beloaded to select the source and to play. CD orDVD will appear on the display if a disc is loaded.If a CD or DVD is not loaded, the display willchange to the auxiliary source, if your vehicle hasthis feature, or stay on the radio.

Vehicle Noise Compensation: Your vehicle hasa Bose® audio system. It includes Bose AudioPilot®

noise compensation technology. When turned on,AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio systemequalization, to compensate for background noise,so that your music always sounds the same at theset volume level.

This feature is most effective at lower radio volumesettings where background noise can affect howwell you hear the music being played throughyour vehicle’s audio system. At higher volumesettings, where the music is much louder thanthe background noise, there may be little or noadjustments by AudioPilot®.


To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume at a low tomoderate listening level. Begin listening while thevehicle is stopped with the motor running. Turn theAudioPilot® on by pressing the tune/sel knob toenter the main menu. Then turn the tune/sel knobuntil VNC:AUDIOPILOT appears on the display.Press the tune/sel knob to turn AudioPilot® on andoff. An X will appear in the box when it is turned on.Then, resume driving, gradually increasing thevehicle speed. You will notice that your musicsounds the same regardless of background noises;such as road noise, tire hum, or wind. With theAudioPilot® turned off, repeat this process againwithout adjusting the volume or tone controls.You will notice that background noise is nowaudible, and will prevent you from hearing softerpassages of the music. To turn AudioPilot® off,press the tune/sel knob to enter the main menu,turn the tune/sel knob until VNC:AUDIOPILOTappears, and press the tune/sel knob. The X inthe box will disappear when it is turned off.For additional information on AudioPilot®,please visit www.bose.com.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1, FM2,or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

w (Tune): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

© ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow buttonto go to the previous station and stay there.Press the right single arrow button to go to thenext station and stay there. The sound willmute while seeking.

The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow scan buttonto enter scan mode. SCAN will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to scan to the nextstation. The radio will go to a station, play forfive seconds, and then go on to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning.


To scan preset stations, press and hold thedouble arrow scan button for more thantwo seconds until you hear a beep and PSCANappears on the display. The radio will go to thefirst preset station, play for five seconds, andthen go on to the next preset station. Press thisbutton again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

A LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this featureyou can set the radio to search for local stationsor stations that are further away for a largerselection. To set this feature to LOCAL orDISTANT, perform the following steps:

1. Press the tune/sel knob to enter themain menu.

2. Turn the tune/sel knob until SEEK LOCALor SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to select eitherLOCAL or DISTANT.

4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit thedisplay. To return to the original display,repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button orwait for the display to time out.

To search for stations, press the single arrowbuttons. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEKwill appear on the display and seek to stationswith strong signals only. If the system is setto DISTANT, D-SEEK will appear on the displayand seek to stations with weak and strong signals.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six AM, six FM1, six FM2,and six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2, orXM1 or XM2 (if equipped).


3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for two seconds until youhear a beep. The set preset station numberwill appear on the display above thepushbutton that it is set to. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed for lessthan two seconds, the station that was setwill return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.To set the preset stations with an equalizationsetting, DSP setting, or a PTY setting, seeeach of these features later in this section.When a preset station is selected, onceone of these additional settings is selected,the preset station will remember each settingand it will remain active, until the setting isselected off for that preset station.

AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the presetstations automatically, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, or FM2.


4. Turn the tune/sel knob until AUTOSTOREPRESETS appears on the display.

5. Press the tune/sel knob to select.AUTOSTORE will appear on the display.The radio will automatically search the bandand select and store the six radio stations withthe strongest signal. The stations will bestored by signal strength, not sequential order.The set preset station number will appearon the display above the pushbutton that itis set to.


When battery power is removed and later applied,you will not have to reset your radio presets.


PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives youthe ability to store two different kinds of stationpresets. HOME can be used for stations availablewhere you live and AWAY can be for stationsavailable outside of your local broadcasting area.To set preset stations for home and awayperform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until PRESETSHOME/AWAY appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to select. HOMEor AWAY will appear on the display.


Follow the manual or automatic steps previouslylisted for setting the preset pushbuttons forboth home and away.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble,perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel know untilBASS – MID – TREBLE appears onthe display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to scroll throughthe settings.

4. Turn the tune/sel knob to increase or todecrease the bass, midrange, or treble.If a station is weak or noisy, decreasethe treble.

5. Press the tune/sel knob to set the adjustment.

6. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit thedisplay. To return to the original displayrepeatedly press the BACK (F6) button orwait for the display to time out.


AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you toselect customized equalization settings. To choosean equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5),perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until EQUALIZERappears on the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to set the equalizationsetting. The equalization setting will appearon the display.


The equalization settings are preset toEQ0 (Normal), EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock),EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk), and EQ5 (Country).

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)To adjust the balance or fade, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob untilBALANCE – FADER appears onthe display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to enter the tonesettings.

4. Press the tune/sel knob to scroll to BALANCEor FADER.

5. Turn the tune/sel knob to adjust the BALANCEto the right or the left speakers and theFADER to the front or the rear speakers.

6. Press the tune/sel knob to set the adjustment.


EQ0 will not appear on the display when inthis mode.


Digital Signal Processing (DSP): This feature isused to provide a choice of different listeningexperiences. To choose a DSP setting, performthe following steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until DSP appearson the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to set the DSPsetting. The DSP setting will appear onthe display.


The DSP settings available are:

• Normal: Select this setting for normal mode,this provides the best sound quality for allseating positions.

• Centerpoint™: Select this setting to enableBose Centerpoint™. Centerpoint™ signalprocessing gives surround sound listening fora CD, MP3, or a DVD stereo audio source.Centerpoint™ delivers five independent audiochannels from conventional stereo recordings.

• Rear: Select this setting to adjust the audio forthe rear seat passengers to receive the bestpossible sound quality.

• Driver: Select this setting to adjust the audiofor the driver to receive the best possiblesound quality.

• 5.1 Surround: Select this setting to turn ontrue 5.1 surround sound processing,available for DVD-A or DVD-V sources thatwere recorded in 5.1 Surround.

− 5.1 Surround + Normal — this mode isoptimized for all seating positions.

− 5.1 Surround + Rear — this mode isoptimized for rear seat occupants.


XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and in Canada.XM™ offers over 100 coast to coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information, including song title andartist name. A service fee is required in order toreceive the XM™ service. For more information,contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

4 (Information): Press this button while in XM™mode to retrieve three different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY. To viewthis information, perform the following:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until INFO appearson the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to select INFO.The display will change to show theadditional XM™ information.


Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning localand national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and will onlywork when the information is available. In rarecases, a radio station may broadcast incorrectinformation that will cause the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.


While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters will appear on thedisplay instead of the frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)for current programming, and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

RDS Messages

ALERT: Alert warns of local and nationalemergencies. When, an alert announcement comeson the current radio station or a related networkstation, ALERT will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume islow or a CD or DVD is playing. If a CD or DVD isplaying, play will stop during the announcement.Alert announcements cannot be turned off. If theradio tunes to a related network station for theannouncement, it will return to the original stationwhen the announcement is finished.

ALERT will not be affected by tests of theemergency broadcast system. This feature isnot supported by all RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current RDS station hasa message, MSG will appear on the display.The message may display the artist, song title,call in phone numbers, etc. If the entire messagedoes not appear on the display, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds untilthe message is completed. Once the completedmessage has been displayed, MSG will disappearfrom the display until another new message isreceived.

To display the last message, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until RECALL RDSMESSAGE appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob. The message willappear on the display.

Once the message has been displayed, MSGwill disappear from the display until another newmessage is received.


TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on thedisplay when the radio detects a signal from anRDS station that has traffic announcementbroadcast capability.

TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears onthe display, the tuned radio station broadcaststraffic announcements and when a trafficannouncement comes on the tuned stationyou will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, when TA is turned on it willseek to a station that does. When a station thatbroadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio will stop seeking and TA will appear onthe display. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, No Traffic will appearon the display.

The radio will play traffic announcements if thevolume is low. The radio will interrupt the play ofa CD or DVD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until TRAFFICANNOUNCE appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to select ON or OFF.An X will appear in the box when TA isselected on.



Activating Program Type (PTY)Stations (RDS and XM™)PTY allows you to search for stations with specifictypes of music. The selectable PTYs are POP,EASY, TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS(Classical), and JAZZ.

To activate program types, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until PROGRAM TYPEMODE appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to select ON or OFF.When PTY is selected, an X wil appear inthe ON box.


Once program type is activated the PTYs willappear on the display above the pushbuttons,in place of the preset stations (if programmed).

Press the pushbutton for the desired PTY.The radio may not go to all of the stations withthat music type when pressing the pushbutton,as not all stations support PTYs.

AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station withthe same program type.

To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until ALTERNATEFREQ. appear on the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to select AF OFF,AF ON, or AF REG. When AF is selectedan X will appear in that box.



Radio Message

THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has been activated.Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 297 later inthis section for further detail.

Using the Six-Disc CD ChangerThe CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur,check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surfaceof the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly.

If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs and DVDs on page 315 for moreinformation.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD; it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen instead.

If an error appears on the display, see“CD Messages” later in this section.


When a CD is inserted, the CD functions willappear on the display above the pushbuttons,in place of the preset stations, if programmed.

M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.

2. Press and release the load button. PleaseWait will appear on the display.

3. When INSERT appears on the display, inserta CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull the CD in.

When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on thedisplay, the number of the CD and the track numberwill appear on the display if the radio is on.

If the radio is on, the CD will begin to playautomatically.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:


2. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. Please Wait will appear onthe display and you will hear a beep.

3. When INSERT appears on the display, inserta CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull the CD in.Do not load a CD until INSERT appears onthe display. The CD player will take upto six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.If you want to load less than six CDs, loadthe desired amount. The CD player willtime out when it does not receive any moreCDs and the last CD loaded will begin to play.

If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will beginto play automatically.

F1 DISCn(Down): Press this pushbutton to goto the previous CD.

F2 DISCm(Up): Press this pushbutton to go tothe next CD.

F3 CD REV { (Reverse): Press and hold thispushbutton to reverse quickly within the track.Holding the pushbutton will play in reverseat 10 times the normal speed. After holding itfor more than four seconds it will play in reverseat 20 times the normal speed. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track will appear on the display.


F4 CD FWD | (Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance quickly within the track.Holding the pushbutton will play at 10 timesthe normal speed. After holding it for more thanfour seconds it will play at 20 times the normalspeed. Release this pushbutton to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track willappear on the display.

F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select fromNORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPTDISC (Repeat CD), RDM TRCK (Random Track),and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).

• Normal: Sets the system for normal play ofthe CD(s).

• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats thetrack over again. RPT TRCK will appear onthe display. Press the MODE pushbuttonagain to turn off repeat play and advance tothe next mode.

• RPT DISC (Repeat CD): Repeats the CDover again. RPT DISC will appear on thedisplay. Press the MODE pushbutton againto turn off repeat play and advance tothe next mode.

• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays thetracks on the current CD in random, ratherthan sequential order. RDM TRCK will appearon the display. Press the MODE pushbuttonagain to turn off random play and advance tothe next mode.

• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of theCDs loaded in random, rather than sequentialorder. RDM ALL will appear on the display.Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn offrandom play and advance to the next mode.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton todisplay the time of the track. Press this pushbuttonagain to display CD PLAY MODE.

©or ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow to goto the start of the current track. Press it againto go to the previous track, or press the rightsingle arrow to go to the start of the next track.Pressing either arrow for more than 2 secondswill search the previous or next tracks at two tracksper second. Release the button to stop searchingand to play the track.


©¨ (Scan): Press this double arrow button tolisten to each track for 10 seconds. The CD willgo to a track, play for 10 seconds, and then goon to the next track. Press this button againto stop scanning.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to select asource, either radio, CD, DVD or AUX, if yourvehicle has this feature. The CD must be loadedto select the source and to play. CD will appear onthe display if a CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded,the display will change to the next available source,either DVD, AUX, if your vehicle has this feature,or radio.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD thatis currently playing, or press and hold this buttonto eject all of the CDs loaded. You will hear a beep.Eject may be activated with the ignition or radio off.If the CD is not removed after a short time, the CDwill be brought back into the CD player for storage.

Using an MP3 CDMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded ona CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 fileson one disc.

• Make sure playlists have a.m3u or.wplextension, other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixedor variable bit rates. Song title, artist name,and album will be available for display bythe radio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easyto find songs while driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.


The player will be able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files. Long file names, folder names,or playlist names may use more disc memoryspace than necessary. To conserve space on thedisc, minimize the length of the file, folder orplaylist names. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though,keep the depth of the folders to a minimumin order to keep down the complexity andconfusion in trying to locate a particular folderduring playback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player will let you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum will be ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory will be treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressed audio files,the directory will be displayed as F1 ROOT.All files contained directly under the root directorywill be accessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) will always beaccessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player will advance to thenext folder in the file structure that containscompressed audio files and the empty folderwill not be displayed or numbered.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files,the files will be located under the root folder.The next and previous folder functions will haveno function on a CD that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displaying the nameof the folder the radio will display ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all fileswill be located under the root folder. The folderdown and the folder up buttons will searchplaylists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.When the radio displays the name of the folderthe radio will display ROOT.


Order of PlayTracks will be played in the following order:

• Play will begin from the first track in thefirst playlist and will continue sequentiallythrough all tracks in each playlist. Whenthe last track of the last playlist has beenplayed, play will continue from the first trackof the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, andthen play will begin from the first trackunder the root directory. When all tracksfrom the root directory have been played,play will continue from files according totheir numerical listing. After playing the lasttrack from the last folder, play will beginagain at the first track of the first folder orroot directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display willnot automatically show the new folder name.The new track name will appear on the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that will be displayed will bethe song name that is contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, andthen the radio will display the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages will be shortened. The display will notshow parts of words on the last page of textand the extension of the filename will not bedisplayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsYou can access preprogrammed playlists whichwere created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you willnot have editing capability. These playlists will betreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.


Playing an MP3

M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:


2. Press and release the load button. PleaseWait will appear on the display.

3. When INSERT appears on the display, inserta CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull the CD in.

When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on thedisplay, the number of the CD and the track numberwill appear on the display if the radio is on.

If the radio is on, the CD will begin to playautomatically.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it will stay in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberwill appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of YourCDs and DVDs on page 315 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. When usingthe CD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot freeof foreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD; it could getcaught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded ona personal computer and a description labelis needed, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen instead.

If an error appears on the display, see“CD Messages” later in this section.

F3 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toenter fast reverse mode. Holding the pushbuttonwill play in reverse at 10 times the normalspeed. After holding it for more than four secondsit will play in reverse at 20 times the normalspeed. Release the pushbutton to return to normalplay mode. The radio will be muted during thereverse mode.

A quick press of this pushbutton will go to thebeginning of the previous folder.

F4 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toenter fast forward mode. Holding the pushbuttonwill play at 10 times the normal speed. Afterholding it for more than four seconds it will playat 20 times the normal speed. Release thepushbutton to return to normal play mode.

A quick press of this pushbutton will go to thebeginning of the next folder.

F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select fromNORMAL, RPT TRCK, and RDM TRCK.• Normal: Sets the system for normal play of

the DVD.• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the

track over again. RPT TRCK will appear onthe display. Press the MODE pushbutton againto turn off repeat play and advance to thenext mode.

• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays thetracks on the current DVD in random,rather than sequential order. RDM TRCKwill appear on the display. Press the MODEpushbutton again to turn off random playand advance to the next mode.



©or ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow buttonto go to the start of the current track. Press itagain to go to the previous track, or press theright single arrow button to go to the next track.Press the right arrow to go to the start of thenext track. Pressing either arrow for more thantwo seconds will search the previous or next tracksat two tracks per second. Release the button tostop searching and to play the track.

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow button toscan the tracks in each folder. The radio will goto the next track, play for 10 seconds, and thengo on to the next track. Press this button againto stop scanning.

w (Tune): Turning the tune knob will fast trackreverse or advance through the tracks in all foldersor playlists. The track number and file name willappear on the display for each track. Turningthis knob while in random will fast track reverseor advance the tracks in sequential order.

4 (Information): Press this button, while an MP3CD is loaded, to view the Title, Artist, Album,or Folder names. To view this information, performthe following:


2. Turn the tune/sel knob until INFO appearson the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to select INFO.The display will change to show the additionalMP3 information.

4. Press one of the following pushbuttons toview that specific information.• F1 TTLE (Title): To display the title name.• F2 ATST (Artist): To display the

artist name.• F3 ALBM (Album): To display the

album name.• F4 FLDR (Folder): To display the

folder name.

5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.To return to the original display, repeatedlypress the BACK (F6) button or wait for thedisplay to time out.


SRCE (Source): Press this button to selecta source, either radio, CD, DVD, or AUX, if yourvehicle has this feature. The CD must be loadedto select the source and to play. CD will appearon the display if a CD is loaded. If a CD isnot loaded, the display will change to the nextavailable source, either DVD, AUX, if your vehiclehas this feature, or radio.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject may be activated with the ignition andthe radio off. If the CD is not removed after ashort time, the CD will be brought back into theCD player for storage.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:• It is very hot. When the temperature returns

to normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road.

When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible.See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your GM dealer when reportingthe problem.


Using the DVD PlayerInsert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radioare on, the CD or DVD will begin playing. A DVDmay be loaded with the radio off, but it will not startplaying until the radio is on, and sourced to DVD.The DVD player can be controlled by the buttonson the radio, the rear seat audio system, and theremote control, if your vehicle has this feature.See the Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 299 for more information. A DVD icon willdisplay whenever a disc is loaded. The DVD playercan also be run for passengers in the rear seat withthe radio off. The rear seat passenger can power onthe video screen and use the remote control tonavigate the disc. See Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 299 for more information.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject the DVDor CD. Eject may be activated with the ignitionor radio off. If the disc is not removed after ashort time, the disc will be pulled back into theDVD player for storage.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDsof the appropriate region code. The region codeis printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

DVD video, DVD audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD +R/RW are fully supported by this DVD player.In addition, standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW,video CD, SACD, MP3, and WMA formatteddiscs are fully supported. If a disc is inserted thatis not supported, an error message will displayand the disc will be ejected.

When a DVD is inserted, the DVD functions willappear on the display above the pushbuttons,in place of the preset stations. These functionsvary based on the type of disc that is inserted.Loading the disc can take some time as the DVDplayer reads the disc and determines the type.


DVD MessagesIf the disc comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returnsto normal, the disc should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait aboutan hour and try again.

• The region code on your DVD may not becorrect for your region.

• The format of the disc may not be compatible.See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the disc.

• The label may be caught in the DVD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your GM dealer when reportingthe problem.

Playing a DVD Video

F1 (Play/Pause): Press this pushbutton to turn onthe video screen, if your vehicle has this feature,and begin playing the DVD. Press this pushbuttonto pause the DVD if it is playing. Press Play (F1)to restart the DVD if it is paused.

F2 (Stop): Press this pushbutton once to stopthe DVD and retain your current position. Pressit again from the stopped state to return tothe beginning of the disc.

F3 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton,if the DVD is playing, to enter fast reverse mode.Holding the pushbutton will play in reverse atfour times the normal speed. After holding it formore than four seconds it will play in reverseat 32 times the normal speed. Release thepushbutton to return to normal play mode.


F4 (Forward): If the DVD player is playing,press and hold this pushbutton to enter fastforward mode. Holding the pushbutton will playat four times the normal speed. After holding itfor more than four seconds it will play at 32 timesthe normal speed. Release the pushbutton toreturn to normal play mode.

Press and hold this pushbutton, if the DVD isplaying, to enter slow forward mode. Holding thepushbutton will play at half the normal speed.After holding it for more than four seconds it willplay at an eighth the normal speed. Releasethe pushbutton to return to the pause state.

F6 (Menu): Press this pushbutton to go tothe DVD root menu and to bring up the menunavigation arrows. Pressing keys F1 through F4will move the cursor to navigate the DVD menu.Press F6 to enter your selection.

©or ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow buttonto go to the start of the current chapter. Press itagain to go to the previous chapter, or pressthe right single arrow button to go to the nextchapter. Press and hold these buttons to changechapter at a rate of one per second.

TUNE/SEL knob: Turn to the left one notch togo to the start of the current chapter. Turn itagain to go to the previous chapter, or turn tothe right one notch to go to the next chapter.

INFO: Press the programmed INFO soft key,or press the TUNE/SEL knob and rotate until INFOis shown, and then press the TUNE/SEL knob.Pressing INFO brings up the Information display.It shows the current Title number, Chapternumber and elapsed time of the DVD, andadditional menu items.

• F1 SUB: Press this pushbutton to view theSubtitle Language Menu.

• F2 ANGLE: Press this pushbutton to viewthe Angle Menu.

• F6 BACK: Press this pushbutton to returnto the previous screen.


Playing a DVD Audio DiscNot all DVD audio discs are recorded to industrystandards and for this reason may not playproperly in your vehicle.

F1 (Play/Pause): Press this pushbutton to pausethe DVD if it is playing. Press Play (F1) to restartthe DVD if it is paused.

F2 (Stop): Press this pushbutton once to stopthe DVD and retain your current position. Pressit again from the stopped state to return tothe beginning of the disc.

F3 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton,if the DVD player is playing, to enter fast reversemode. Holding the pushbutton will play in reverseat four times the normal speed. After holding it formore than four seconds it will play in reverse at32 times the normal speed. Release the pushbuttonto return to normal play mode.

F4 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton,if the DVD player is playing, to enter fast forwardmode. Holding the pushbutton will play atfour times the normal speed. After holding it formore than four seconds it will play in reverseat 32 times the normal speed. Release thepushbutton to return to normal play mode.

F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select fromNORMAL, and RPT TRCK.

• Normal: Sets the system for normal playof the DVD.

• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats thetrack over again. RPT TRCK will appear onthe display. Press the MODE pushbutton againto turn off repeat play and advance to thenext mode.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton todisplay the time of the track. Press this pushbuttonagain to display DVD PLAY MODE.

©or ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow buttonto go to the start of the current track. Press itagain to go to the previous track, or press theright single arrow button to go to the next track.Press and hold these buttons to change tracks ata rate of one per second.

TUNE/SEL knob: Turn to the left one notch togo to the start of the current track. Turn it againto go to the previous track, or turn to the rightone notch to go to the next track.


If your vehicle has rear seat entertainment,you can view the menu and playlist from yourDVD audio disc on the video screen. Turn onthe video screen with the power button onthe remote control to view and navigate themenu and playlists. See Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 299 for more information.

Playing a CD in the DVD Drive

F3 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toenter fast reverse mode. Holding the pushbuttonwill play in reverse at four times the normal speed.After holding it for more than four seconds it willplay in reverse at 32 times the normal speed.Release the pushbutton to return to normalplay mode.

F4 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toenter fast forward mode. Holding the pushbuttonwill play at four times the normal speed. Afterholding it for more than four seconds it will playat 32 times the normal speed. Release thepushbutton to return to normal play mode.

F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select fromNORMAL, RPT TRCK, and RDM TRCK.






©or ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow buttonto go to the start of the current track. Press itagain to go to the previous track, or press theright single arrow button to go to the next track.Press and hold these buttons to change tracksat a rate of one per second.


©¨ (Scan): Press this double arrow button tolisten to each track for 10 seconds. The CD willgo to a track, play for 10 seconds, and then goon to the next track. Press this button again tostop scanning.

If your vehicle has rear seat entertainment, youcan view the track details from your CD onthe video screen. Turn on the video screen withthe power button on the remote control to view andnavigate the tracks. See Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 299 for more information.

Playing an MP3 Formatted DiscSee “Using an MP3 CD” earlier in this section foradditional information.

F3 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toenter fast reverse mode. Holding the pushbuttonwill play in reverse at four times the normal speed.After holding it for more than four seconds it willplay in reverse at 32 times the normal speed.Release the pushbutton to return to normalplay mode.

A quick press of this pushbutton will go to thebeginning of the previous folder.

F4 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toenter fast forward mode. Holding the pushbuttonwill play at four times the normal speed. Afterholding it for more than four seconds it will playat 32 times the normal speed. Release thepushbutton to return to normal play mode.

A quick press of this pushbutton will advance tothe next folder.


F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select fromNORMAL, RPT TRCK, and RDM TRCK.





©or ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow buttonto go to the start of the current track. Press itagain to go to the previous track, or press theright single arrow button to go to the next track.Press and hold these buttons to change tracksat a rate of one per second.


©¨ (Scan): Press this double arrow button tolisten to each track for 10 seconds. The CD willgo to a track, play for 10 seconds, and then goon to the next track. Press this button again tostop scanning.

If your vehicle is equipped with rear seatentertainment, you can view the menu and playlistfrom your CD on the video screen. Turn on thevideo screen with the power button on the remotecontrol to view and navigate the menu andplaylists. See Rear Seat Entertainment Systemon page 299 for more information.

Using the AUX Display (If Equipped)If your vehicle has rear seat entertainment, you willsee an AUX screen as you press through the SRCEkey. When AUX is selected in the front, the audiofrom the device plugged into the auxiliary jacks inthe rear will be played over the vehicle speakers.


You have the ability to select between AUX andDVD video on the video screen while listeningto AUX audio. See Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 299 for more information onthe auxiliary jacks.

SRCE (Source): Press this pushbutton to selectthe AUX display.

F2 (DVD): Press this pushbutton to select DVDvideo on the video screen in the rear, withAUX audio on the vehicle speakers.

F5 (AUX): Press his pushbutton to select AUXvideo on the video screen in the rear, with AUXaudio on the vehicle speakers.

Configurable Radio Display KeysThis feature allows you to customize the four keysthat are located on each side of the radio displayto make it easier to adjust the radio features.

To program the configurable radio display keys,perform the following steps:

1. Press the tune/sel knob to enter the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/sel knob until SETUP appearson the display.

3. Press the tune/sel knob to enter into SETUP.

4. Turn the tune/sel knob until CONFIGUREDISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.

5. Press the tune/sel knob to enter intoCONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.

6. Turn the tune/sel knob to select which ofthe four configurable keys you would liketo change. The currently assigned featurewill be shown.

7. Press the tune/sel knob to select theconfigurable key to change.

8. Turn the tune/sel knob to find the feature thatyou would like to store to the key.

9. Press the tune/sel knob when you have foundthe feature to be stored. The display willupdate, by showing the symbol of the featurethat you selected next to the configurable key.

10. Repeat the previous steps for eachconfigurable key.

Once a feature is programmed to a key, thefeature will not appear on the display whenprogramming the remaining configurable keys.The configurable keys can be changed at any time.


XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and noaction is required. This process should take no longer than30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and textdata. No action is needed. This message should disappearshortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.


Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourGM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only occur withhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.


Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle’s audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio. The RSE systemincludes a radio with a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, two wireless headphones, anda remote control. See Radio with CD and DVDon page 268 for more information on the vehicle’saudio/DVD system.

Driver Control of the Audio SystemThe driver has basic control of the whole audiosystem. If the driver decides to globally turnthe audio system off, the driver can press andhold the power knob for more than two secondsto turn off the radio, rear seat entertainment (RSE),and the rear seat audio (RSA). See Radio withCD and DVD on page 268 for more information.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, see theNavigation System manual for more information.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions theRSE system may or may not work until thetemperature is within the operating range.The operating range for the RSE system isabove −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).If the temperature of your vehicle is outside ofthis range, heat or cool the vehicle until thetemperature is within the operating range ofthe RSE system.


Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channel wirelessheadphones that are dedicated to this system.These headphones are used to listen to mediasuch as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, orany auxiliary source connected to the auxiliaryinput jack, if your vehicle has this feature or A/Vjacks. The wireless headphones have a powerOn/Off button, channel selector switch (1 or 2),and a volume control.

If your vehicle has a third row video screendisplay, it will have two additional headphones.

Push the power button to turn on the headphones.An indicator light located on the headphoneswill illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to Off whennot in use. Channel 1 is dedicated to the videoscreen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSAselections.

The infrared transmitters are located at the rearof the RSE overhead console. The headphoneswill shut off automatically to save the battery powerif the DVD system is shut off or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmitters for morethan 3 minutes. If you move too far forward orstep out of the vehicle, the headphones will losethe audio signal.

The headphones will automatically turn off after4 hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, usethe volume control located on the right side.


For optimal audio performance, the headphonesmust be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)will appear on the upper left side, above the earpad and should be positioned on the left ear.The symbol R (Right) will appear on the upperright side, above the ear pad and should bepositioned on the right ear.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

The foam ear pads attached to the headphonesmay become worn or damaged if they arenot handled or stored properly. If the foam earpads do become damaged or worn out, the padscan be replaced separately from the headphoneset. It is not necessary to replace the completeheadphone set. The headphone replacementfoam ear pads can be ordered in pairs. See yourdealer for more information.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driverto loosen, then slide open the battery doorlocated on the left side of the headphones.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram onthe inside of the battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door and tighten thedoor screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keepthem in a cool, dry place.


Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks are located on the rear of thefloor console. The A/V jacks allow audio orvideo signals to be connected from an auxiliarydevice such as a camcorder or a video gameunit to the RSE system. Adapter connectorsor cables may be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to themanufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded to match typicalhome entertainment system equipment. Theyellow jack is for the video input. The white jackis for the left audio input. The red jack is forthe right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied bythe radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen power on. If the videoscreen is in the DVD player mode, pressing theAUX button on the remote control will switch thevideo screen from the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audioof the connected auxiliary device by sourcing toauxiliary. See Radio with CD and DVD on page 268for more information.


How to Change the Video FormatWhen in the Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary input video format is preset toNTSC. In some countries, the video format maybe PAL. To change the video format, performthe following:

1. Press the display menu button on theremote control.

2. Select screen option and press enter toselect.

3. Press the up or down arrow buttons toselect the video format option and pressenter to set the format.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs maybe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on therear seat audio system, if your vehicle hasthis feature.

The RSE system will always transmit the audiosignal to the wireless headphones, if there isaudio available. See “Headphones” earlier in thissection for more information.

The DVD player is capable of outputting audio tothe wired headphone jacks on the RSA system,if your vehicle has this feature. The DVDplayer may be selected as an audio source onthe RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)on page 310 for more information.

When a device is connected to the A/V jacks,the rear seat passengers will be able to hear audiofrom the auxiliary device through the wireless orwired headphones. The front seat passengeswill be able to listen to playback from this devicethrough the vehicle speakers by selecting AUXas the source on the radio.

If a playback device is plugged into the radio’sauxiliary input jack, the front seat passengers willbe able to listen to playback from this devicethrough the vehicle speakers by selecting AUXas the source on the radio.


Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the RSE overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button located on theRSE overhead console.

2. Rotate the screen to the desired position.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised toits locked position, the screen will remain on,this is normal, and the DVD will continue to playthrough the previous audio source.

The RSE overhead console contains the IRtransmitters for the wireless headphones andthe IR receivers for the remote control. They arelocated at the rear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow at the rear of the RSE overhead consoleand press the desired button. Direct sunlightor very bright light may affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries may need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.Objects blocking the line of sight may alsoaffect the function of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, theremote control power button can be used to turnon the video screen display and start the disc. Theradio can also turn on the video screen display.See Radio with CD and DVD on page 268for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored ina cool, dry place.


Remote Control Buttons

O(Power): Press this button to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this button to turn theremote control backlight on. The backlightwill automatically time out after 7 to 10 secondsif no other button is pressed while the backlightis on.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVDto the main menu of the DVD. This function mayvary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu is differenton every DVD. Use the up, down, left, and rightarrow buttons to move the cursor around theDVD menu. After making a selection press theenter button. This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Q, R, q, r (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicethat is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

q(Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button will operate only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.


c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press thisbutton twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to startplaying a DVD. Press this button while a DVD isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

When the DVD is playing, depending on theradio, you may be able to do slow play by pressingthe pause button then pressing the fast forwardbutton. The DVD will continue playing in aslow play mode. You may also, depending onthe radio, perform reverse slow play by pressingthe pause button and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow play mode,press the play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button togo to the beginning of the next chapter ortrack. This button may not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversinga DVD video, press the play button. To stop fastreversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fastreverse button. This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwardinga DVD video, press the play button. To stopfast forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release thefast forward button. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

e (Audio): Press this button to change audiotracks on DVDs that have this feature whenthe DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function will vary for each disc.


{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFFsubtitles and to move through subtitle optionswhen a DVD is playing. The format and contentof this function will vary for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

If your vehicle has a third row video screen, theAUX button will control the source display onthe second row video screen, and the third rowvideo screen as described in the table below:

Aux ButtonPress

Second RowScreen

Third RowScreen

Default State(No Press) DVD Media DVD Media

First Press Aux VideoSource

Aux VideoSource

Second Press DVD Media Aux VideoSource

Third Press Aux VideoSource DVD Media

Fourth Press Return toDefault State

Return toDefault State

d (Camera): Press this button to changecamera angles on DVDs that have this featurewhen a DVD is playing. The format and contentof this function will vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapteror track number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter entering a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbers greater than 9.Press this button before entering the number.


Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the battery compartment doorlocated on the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram onthe inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a long periodof time, remove the batteries and keep them in acool, dry place.

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition might not beturned on or in accessory.

The picture does notfill the screen. Thereare black borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Check the displaymode settings in thedisplay menu.


In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliaryinput connections atboth devices.

The remote controldoes not work.

Check to make surethere is no obstructionbetween the remotecontrol and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they arenot dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping theplayer, I push Play butsometimes the DVDstarts where I left offand sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player will resumeplaying where theDVD was stopped.If the stop button waspressed two times theDVD player will begin toplay from the beginningof the DVD.



The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cutsout or buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone inthe vehicle.Check that theheadphones are facingthe front of the vehicle.

I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer forassistance.

The DVD is playing,but there is no pictureor sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is sourced to theDVD player.

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error message depends onwhich radio you have. The video screen maydisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message isdisplayed when there are disc load or ejectproblems.

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is inserted with the disclabel wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message will bedisplayed, if no disc is present when the EJECTor DVD/AUX button is pressed on the radio.


DVD DistortionVideo distortion may occur when operating cellularphones, scanners, CB radios, Global PositionSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or nearthe vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead ConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overhead consolesurface, use only a clean cloth dampened withclean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only aclean cloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen,as damage may result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listento and control any of the music sources: radio,CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. Therear seat passengers can control the same musicsources the front seat passengers are listeningto (dual control) or a different source. For example,rear seat passengers can listen to and controla CD through the headphones, while the driverlistens to the radio through the speakers. Therear seat passengers have control of the volumefor each set of headphones.

You can operate the RSA functions even whenthe main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wired headphones(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If your vehicle has this feature, audio can alsobe heard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

The audio system allows the rear speakers tocontinue playing even when the RSA audiois active through the headphones.


P (Power): Press this button to turn RSAon and off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume of the wired headphones.The left knob controls the left headphones andthe right knob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM/FM), XM (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

©¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM(if equipped), press the seek up or the seekdown arrow to go to the next or the previousstation or channels and stay there. This functionis inactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrowuntil the display flashes, to tune to an individualstation. The display will stop flashing afterthe buttons have not been pushed for more thantwo seconds. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

While listening to a CD, press the seek up arrowto hear the next track on the CD. Press theseek down arrow to go back to the start of thecurrent track (if more than ten seconds haveplayed). This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow toperform a cursor up or down on the menu.Hold the seek up or seek down arrow to performa cursor right or left on the menu.


PROG (Program): Press this button to go tothe next preset radio station or channel set on themain radio. This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press thisbutton to go to the beginning of the CD orDVD audio. This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengers are listeningto the disc.

When a disc is playing in the CD or DVDchanger, press this button to select the next disc,if multiple discs are loaded. This function isinactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the CD/DVD audio.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the PROG button to perform the menufunction, enter.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radiois moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate.If the radio is removed from your vehicle, theoriginal VIN in the radio can be used to tracethe radio back to your vehicle.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.


Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle hasaudio steering wheelcontrols, they may differdepending on yourvehicle’s options. Someaudio controls can beadjusted at the steeringwheel. They includethe following:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or to the previousradio station stored as a favorite.

When a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or previous trackor chapter.

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the vehicle speakers only.The audio of the wireless and wired headphones,if your vehicle has these features, will not bemuted. Press and release this button again, to turnthe sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, pressand hold this button for longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition”in the Navigation System manual for moreinformation.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and holdthis button for longer than one second to interactwith the OnStar system. If your vehicle alsohas the navigation system, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to initiate voicerecognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar®

mode. See the OnStar® System on page 163 inthis manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.


+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™(if equipped). Press this button to go to thenext track or chapter while sourced to the DVDslot. Press the button to go to the next disc whilesourced to a CD or DVD changer, if multiplediscs are loaded.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interferenceand static during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other.

For better radio reception, most AM radio stationswill boost the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static canalso occur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time. Theradio may display No Signl to indicate interference.


Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scansthe bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly or not atall. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft,lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Rear Side Window AntennaYour AM-FM antenna is located in the passengerrear side window. Be sure that the insidesurfaces of the rear side window is not scratchedand that the lines on the glass are not damaged.If the inside surfaces are damaged, they couldinterfere with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside of the rear side windows mayaffect radio reception or damage the antenna.Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not clear the inside of the rear side windowswith sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damage causedto your antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

Because this antenna is built into your rear sidewindow, there is a reduced risk of damage causedby car washes and vandals.


If you choose to add an aftermarket cellulartelephone to your vehicle, and the antenna needsto be attached to the glass, be sure that youdo not damage the grid lines for the AM-FMantennas or place the cellular telephone antennaover the grid lines.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performanceof the XM™ system may be affected if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antennais not obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume levelwill change from the normal level to loud,and LOUD will appear on the radio display.To change back to the default or normal setting,press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volumelevel will change from the loud level to normal,and NORMAL will appear on the radio display.Each time the chime volume is changed,three chimes will sound as an example of thenew volume selected. Removing the radio andnot replacing it with a factory radio or chimemodule will disable vehicle chimes.


Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle .............................................318Defensive Driving .......................................318Drunken Driving .........................................319Control of a Vehicle ...................................322Braking ......................................................322Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................323Braking in Emergencies ..............................325Locking Differential .....................................325Road Sensing Suspension ..........................325StabiliTrak® System ....................................326All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ..................328Steering .....................................................329Off-Road Recovery .....................................331Passing ......................................................331Loss of Control ..........................................333Off-Road Driving .........................................334Driving at Night ..........................................350Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads .............351

City Driving ................................................354Freeway Driving .........................................355Before Leaving on a Long Trip ...................356Highway Hypnosis ......................................357Hill and Mountain Roads ............................358Winter Driving ............................................360If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................................364Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ............364Recovery Hooks .........................................365Loading Your Vehicle .................................366

Towing .........................................................372Towing Your Vehicle ..................................372Recreational Vehicle Towing .......................372Autoride® ....................................................374Towing a Trailer .........................................375Trailer Recommendations ...........................388

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle


Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 38.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.


Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment• Muscular Coordination

• Vision• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol


According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.


But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance ofthis driver having a collision is 12 times greater;at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.


Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehiclego where you want it to go. They are the brakes,the steering, and the accelerator. All threesystems have to do their work at the places wherethe tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 326.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 393.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 228.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.


Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops. Yourbrakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot ofheavy braking. If you keep pace with the trafficand allow realistic following distances, youwill eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving,brake normally but do not pump your brakes.If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down.If your engine stops, you will still have somepower brake assist. But you will use it whenyou brake. Once the power assist is used up,it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 229.

Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic RearProportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRPproblem, both the brake and ABS warning lightswill come on accompanied by a 10-secondchime. The lights and chime will come on eachtime the ignition is turned on until the problem isrepaired. See your dealer for service.


Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.


Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Locking DifferentialIf your vehicle has this feature, your lockingdifferential can give you additional traction onsnow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works likea standard axle most of the time, but when one ofthe wheels has no traction and the other does,this feature will allow the wheel with tractionto move the vehicle.

Road Sensing SuspensionThe Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) featureprovides superior vehicle ride and handling undera variety of passenger and loading conditions.

The system is fully automatic and uses a computercontroller to continuously monitor vehicle speed,wheel to body position, lift/dive and steeringposition of the vehicle. The controller then sendssignals to each shock absorber to independentlyadjust the damping level to provide the optimumvehicle ride.


RSS also interacts with the tow/haul mode that,when engaged, will provide additional controlof the shock absorbers. This additional controlresults in better ride and handling characteristicswhen the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer.See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a Traileron page 375.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, whichcombines antilock brake, traction and stabilitycontrol systems and helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in most drivingconditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin todrive away, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to insure there are no problems. Youmay hear or feel the system working. Thisis normal and does not mean there is a problemwith your vehicle. The system should initializebefore the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).In some cases, it may take approximatelytwo miles of driving before the system initializes.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theSTABILITRAK OFF or SERVICE STABILITRAKmessage will be displayed. If the vehicle has gonethrough heavy acceleration or braking or multipleturns during the first two miles of driving afterstarting your vehicle, these messages may alsoappear. If this is the case, your vehicle doesnot need servicing. You will need to turnthe vehicle off and then restart it to initializeStabiliTrak®. If either message appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC), and your vehiclehasn’t gone through hard acceleration, brakingor multiple turns in the first two miles of driving,your vehicle should be taken in for service.For more information on the stability messages,see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 239.

StabiliTrak® activates when the computersenses that your vehicle is just starting to spin, asit might if you hit a patch of ice or other slipperyspot on the road. When the system activates,you may hear a noise or feel a vibration inthe brake pedal. This is normal. The system isdesigned to help you in bad weather or otherdifficult driving situations by making the most ofwhatever road conditions will permit.


The StabiliTrak® lightwill flash on theinstrument panel clusterwhen the system isboth on and activated.

StabiliTrak® and part ofthe traction controlsystem can be turned offor back on by pressingthe StabiliTrak® buttonlocated on theinstrument panel.

When the system is turned off, the StabiliTrak®

light will flash, and the STABILITRAK OFFmessage will appear on the DIC to warn thedriver that both the stability system and part ofthe traction control system are disabled. Yourvehicle will still have brake-traction control whenStabiliTrak® is off, but will not be able to usethe engine speed management system. See“Traction Control Operation” next for moreinformation.

When the StabiliTrak® system has been turnedoff, you may still hear system noises as a result ofthe brake-traction control coming on.

To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefitsof the stability enhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak® on, but it may benecessary to turn the system off if your vehicle isstuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you wantto “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It mayalso be necessary to turn off the system whendriving in extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 364.

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of theStabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and by applyingbrakes to each individual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle, andit will activate and display the StabiliTrak® light ifit senses that any of the wheels are spinningor beginning to lose traction while driving.


If you turn off StabiliTrak®, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction control will work. Theengine speed management will be disabled. In thisstate, engine power is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spin more freely.This can cause the brake-traction control toactivate constantly.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axleto spin excessively while the StabiliTrak®,ABS and brake warning lights and theSERVICE STABILITRAK message aredisplayed, you could damage the transfercase. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Reduce engine power anddo not spin the wheel(s) excessively whilethese lights and this message are displayed.

The traction control system may activate ondry or rough roads or under conditions suchas heavy acceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of the transmission. Whenthis happens you may notice a reduction inacceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 194.

StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your dealer forservice.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 393 for more information.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle is equipped with this feature,engine power is sent to all four wheels when extratraction is needed. This is like four-wheel drive,but there is no separate lever or switch to engageor disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic,and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions.


Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See StabiliTrak® System on page 326.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

If you have StabiliTrak®, you may see theSTABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on themessage center. See “Stability System ActiveMessage” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 245.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions youwill want to go slower.


If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 322. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.


The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement. You can turnthe steering wheel up to one-quarter turn untilthe right front tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn your steering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.


So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing patterns. If you have anydoubt whatsoever about making a successfulpass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markingsand lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass iscoming up, start to accelerate but stay inthe right lane and do not get too close.

Time your move so you will be increasingspeed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass,you will have a running start that more thanmakes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happensto cause you to cancel your pass, youneed only slow down and drop back againand wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as youpull out to pass the slow vehicle. Rememberto glance over your shoulder and checkthe blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulderand start your left lane change signal beforemoving out of the right lane to pass. When youare far enough ahead of the passed vehicleto see its front in your inside mirror, activateyour right lane change signal and moveback into the right lane. Remember that if yourpassenger side outside mirror is convex, thevehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.


• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicletoo rapidly. Even though the brake lampsare not flashing, it may be slowing down orstarting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy forthe following driver to get ahead of you.Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep tryingto steer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.


If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingThis off-road guide is for vehicles that haveall-wheel drive. If your vehicle does not haveall-wheel drive or if it has 20-inch tire/wheelassemblies, you should not drive off-road unlessyou are on a level, solid surface. See Tireson page 450.

Many of the same design features that help makeyour vehicle responsive on paved roads duringpoor weather conditions — features like all-wheeldrive — help make it much better suited foroff-road use. Its higher ground clearance alsohelps your vehicle step over some off-roadobstacles. But your vehicle does not have featureslike special underbody shielding and a transfercase low gear range, things that are usuallythought necessary for extended or severe off-roadservice.

Also, see Braking on page 322.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these isthe terrain itself.


“Off-roading” means you have left the NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes arenot marked. Curves are not banked. There areno road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,uphill, or downhill. In short, you have goneright back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. Andthat is why it is very important that you readthis guide. You will find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

If you think you will need some more groundclearance at the front of your vehicle, youcan remove the front fascia lower air dam.

The front fascia lower air dam is held in place bytwo bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts andsnap features are accessible from underneaththe front fascia.

The following steps must be performed on thebolts and snap features to remove the air dam:

1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.

2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down onthe snap features and disengage the snaps.

3. After the bolts are removed and the snapsare disengaged, push forward on the airdam until it is free.

When you are back on roads, though, be sure toreplace the air dam.

Notice: Operating your vehicle for extendedperiods without the front fascia lower airdam installed can cause improper air flow tothe engine. Always be sure to replace the frontfascia air dam when you are finished off-roaddriving.

To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:

1. Line up the snap features and push theair dam rearward to engage the snaps.

2. Install the two outboard bolts.


Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Check tomake sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle hasthem, are properly attached. Is there enoughfuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluidlevels up where they should be? What arethe local laws that apply to off-roading where youwill be driving? If you do not know, you shouldcheck with law enforcement people in thearea. Will you be on someone’s private land?If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. You oryour passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor canbe tossed about when driving overrough terrain. You or your passengerscan be struck by flying objects.Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, making itmore likely to roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured if thevehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.


There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and forward of the rear axle. Putheavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly,so driving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 366,Luggage Carrier on page 172, and Tires onpage 450.

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, andareas that have been specially set asidefor public off-road recreational driving; obeyall posted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground.

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure allrefuse is removed from any campsitebefore leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires wherepermitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass orother combustible materials that couldcatch fire from the heat of the vehicle’sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain and planyour route. You are much less likely to get badsurprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain.Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at leastone other vehicle. If something happens toone of them, the other can help quickly.


Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that issafe and close to home before you go into thewilderness. Off-road driving does require some newand different driving skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Youreyes, for example, need to constantly sweep theterrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need tolisten for unusual tire or engine sounds. With yourarms, hands, feet, and body, you will need torespond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways to controlyour vehicle is to control your speed. Here aresome things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:

• You approach things faster and you have lesstime to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when youdrive over obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash. So, whetheryou are driving on or off the road, you andyour passengers should wear safety belts.

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features.Here are some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affectsthe steering, acceleration, and braking of yourvehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kindof surface you are on, you may experience slipping,sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poortraction, and longer braking distances.


Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not prepared forthem. Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall ofthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptlyup ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of thesesubjects later.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or roughterrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel.Ruts, troughs, or other surface features canjerk the wheel out of your hands if you arenot prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, the wheels can leave the ground.If this happens, even with one or two wheels,you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kindof alertness from driving on paved roads andhighways. There are no road signs, posted speedlimits, or signal lights. You have to use yourown good judgment about what is safe and whatis not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous onany road. And this is certainly true for off-roaddriving. At the very time you need special alertnessand driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,and judgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have a serious — oreven fatal — accident if you drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.See Drunken Driving on page 319.


Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requiresgood judgment and understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are somehills that simply cannot be driven, no matter howwell built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you willstall. If you drive down them, you cannotcontrol your speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness, do notdrive the hill.

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decideif it is one of those hills that is just too steepto climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can behard to judge. On a very small hill, for example,there may be a smooth, constant incline with onlya small change in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,the incline may get steeper as you near thetop, but you may not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider asyou approach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hillget sharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?


• Are there obstructions on the hill that canblock your path, such as boulders, trees,logs, or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff,an embankment, a drop-off, a fence?Get out and walk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are more susceptible tothe effects of erosion.

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill,you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain your speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantthe wheels to start spinning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.


• Sound the horn as you approach the top of thehill to let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use the headlamps even during the day. Theymake you more visible to oncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, oris about to stall, and I cannot make it upthe hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do, and there are some things youmust not do? First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it from rolling backwards. Also, applythe parking brake.

• If the engine is still running, shift thetransmission to REVERSE (R), release theparking brake, and slowly back down the hill inREVERSE (R).

• If the engine has stopped running, you willneed to restart it. With the brake pedalpressed and the parking brake still applied,shift the transmission to PARK (P) and restartthe engine. Then shift to REVERSE (R),release the parking brake, and slowly backdown the hill as straight as possible inREVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way you will be able to tell ifthe wheels are straight and maneuver as youback down. It is best that you back downthe hill with the wheels straight rather thanin the left or right direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right will increase thepossibility of a rollover.


Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shiftinginto NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engineand regain forward momentum. This will notwork. Your vehicle will roll backwardsvery quickly and you could go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stopthe vehicle. Then apply the parking brake.Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are aboutto stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steepenough to cause you to roll over if you turnaround. If you cannot make it up the hillyou must back straight down the hill.

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it.What should I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put the transmissionin PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leavethe vehicle and go get some help. Exit onthe uphill side and stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if it rolled downhill.


Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will wantto consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able tomaintain vehicle control?

• What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down,and use a low gear. This way, engine dragcan help the brakes and they will not have todo all the work. Descend slowly, keepingyour vehicle under control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.


Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control andhave a serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the incline of the hill. A hill thatis not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. You could roll overif you do not drive straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.”The brakes will have to do all the workand could overheat and fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen goinguphill. But if it happens going downhill,here is what to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.


Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up or downmay be too steep to drive across. When you gostraight up or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance from the frontwheels to the rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.But when you drive across an incline, the muchmore narrow track width — the distancebetween the left and right wheels — may notprevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem whenyou drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can cause the tiresto slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicleslips sideways, it can hit something that willtrip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is toosteep will make your vehicle roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness of the incline, do not driveacross it. Find another route instead.


Q: What if I am driving across an incline thatis not too steep, but I hit some loosegravel and start to slide downhill. Whatshould I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. However, a much better way toprevent this is to get out and “walk the course”so you know what the surface is like beforeyou drive it.

Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing anincline, be sure you, and any passengers, get outon the uphill side, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out on the downhill sideand the vehicle starts to roll over, you will beright in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of thepath the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side ofa vehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.


Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheelswill not get good traction. You cannot accelerateas quickly, turning is more difficult, and youwill need longer braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehiclemoving so you do not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, thetires will tend to sink into the sand. This hasan effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction isso poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.And, if you do get moving, poor steering anddifficult braking can cause you to slide outof control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drivethrough it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheelhubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — youprobably will not get through. Also, water that deepcan damage the axle and other vehicle parts.


If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling canalso occur if you get the tailpipe under water.And, as long as the tailpipe is under water, youwill never be able to start the engine. When yougo through water, remember that when the brakesget wet, it may take you longer to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads onpage 351 for more information on drivingthrough water.

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collectedon the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Checkthe body structure, steering, suspension, wheels,tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also,check the fuel lines and cooling system forany leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule for additional information.


Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reducethe glare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.


Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far lessof a roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easierto pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as theheadlamps should be checked regularly forproper aim, so should your eyes be examinedregularly. Some drivers suffer from nightblindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do nothave much tread left, you will get even less traction.It is always wise to go slower and be cautious ifrain starts to fall while you are driving. The surfacemay get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tunedfor driving on dry pavement.


The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They willnot work as well in a quick stop and maycause pulling to one side. You could losecontrol of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until your brakes worknormally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,try to slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.


Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intakeand badly damage your engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower thanthe underbody of your vehicle. If you cannotavoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.



If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 450.


City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 355.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.


Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the otherdrivers are driving.

Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smoothtraffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway asa passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.


When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you caneasily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?


Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.


Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.See Off-Road Driving on page 334 for informationabout driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.


{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.


Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 450.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, orgrip, and will need to be very careful.


What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more. See StabiliTrak® System on page 326,If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 364, and Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 364.Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 323.• Allow greater following distance on any

slippery road.• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be

fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.


If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.


{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so youmight not know it is in your vehicle.Clear away snow from around the baseof your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And checkaround again from time to time to besure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the sideof the vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, makeit go a little faster than just idle. That is, pushthe accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel forthe heat that you get and it keeps the batterycharged. You will need a well-charged batteryto restart the vehicle, and possibly for signalinglater on with your headlamps. Let the heaterrun for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But doit as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.


If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others couldbe injured. And, the transmission or otherparts of the vehicle can overheat. Thatcould cause an engine compartment fireor other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible.Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting yourtransmission back and forth, you can destroyyour transmission.

For more information about using tire chains onyour vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 471.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. Thatwill clear the area around your front wheels. If yourvehicle has the StabiliTrak® System, turn thesystem off by pressing the StabiliTrak® button sothat the STABILITY SYS DISABLED messageand the traction off light are illuminated on theinstrument panel cluster. Then shift back andforth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,spinning the wheels as little as possible.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift,and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.


By slowly spinning your wheels in the forwardand reverse directions, you will cause a rockingmotion that may free your vehicle. If that doesnot get you out after a few tries, you may needto be towed out. Or, you can use your recoveryhooks if your vehicle has them. If you do needto be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicleon page 372.

Recovery Hooks

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under alot of force. Always pull the vehiclestraight out. Never pull on the hooks at asideways angle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to towthe vehicle. Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered by warranty.

Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at thefront of the vehicle. You may need to use them ifyou are stuck off-road and need to be pulledto some place where you can continue driving.


Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it was designed to carry, the Tireand Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).With the driver’s door open, you will find thelabel attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label showsthe number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B)in kilograms and pounds.

Label Example


The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 450 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 456.

There is also important loading information onthe vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle. See Towinga Trailer on page 375 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.


Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2





1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loadinginformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.The label shows the size of your vehicle’s originaltires and the inflation pressures needed to obtainthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This iscalled Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Example 3


To find out the actual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help youwith this. Be sure to spread out your load equallyon both sides of the center line.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Your warranty does not cover parts or componentsthat fail because of overloading.

The label will help you decide how much cargoand installed equipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspension components toget added durability might not change your weightratings. Ask your dealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.


{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

There is also important loading information foroff-road driving in this manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-RoadDriving on page 334.

Add-On EquipmentWhen you carry removable items, you may needto put a limit on how many people you cancarry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh yourvehicle before you buy and install the newequipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rear suspensioncomes as a part of the Road Sensing Suspension.See Road Sensing Suspension on page 325.

This type of level control is fully automatic and willprovide a better leveled riding position as wellas better handling under a variety of passengerand loading conditions. An air compressorconnected to the rear shocks will raise or lowerthe rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated when theignition key is turned to RUN and will automaticallyadjust vehicle height thereafter.


The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) forup to 10 minutes after the ignition key has beenturned to LOCK. You may hear the air compressoroperating when the height is being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it isrecommended to allow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting theheight. See “Weight distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying Hitches” under Towing a Traileron page 375.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Service on page 541.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towingfollowing.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.


• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 356.

Dinghy Towing and Dolly TowingAll-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, or even withonly two of its wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components. Do not tow anall-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheelswill be on the ground.

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed with anyof the wheels on the ground. If your vehiclemust be towed, see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 372.

Dinghy TowingTwo-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while being towed.


Dolly TowingTwo-Wheel-Drive Vehicles (Rear WheelsOff the Ground)

Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Nevertow your vehicle with the rear wheels on theground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towedwith the rear wheels on the ground.Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while being towed.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles can be towed on a dollywith the front wheels on the ground providedthat the wheels are straight.

Use the following procedure to dolly tow yourvehicle:

1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.

2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).

3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow dolly.

6. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe towing vehicle.

Autoride®

The Autoride® feature provides improved vehicleride and handling under a variety of passenger andloading conditions.

The system is fully automatic and uses a computercontroller to continuously monitor vehicle speed,wheel to body position, lift/dive and steeringposition of the vehicle. The controller then sendssignals to each shock absorber to independentlyadjust the damping level to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul modethat, when activated, will provide additional controlof the shock absorbers. This additional controlresults in better ride and handling characteristicswhen the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer.See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a Traileron page 375 for more information.


Towing a TrailerDo not tow a trailer during break-in. See NewVehicle Break-In on page 137 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle;the resulting repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in thissection. Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in this part, and seeyour dealer for important information abouttowing a trailer with your vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.


If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not onlywhere you live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can bestate or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may wantto shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or,if necessary, a lower gear selection ifthe transmission shifts too often (e.g., underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions).See “Tow/Haul Mode” next.

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires

Tow/Haul ModeTow/haul is designed to assist while yourvehicle is pulling a large or heavy load or trailer.Tow/haul is most useful while pulling such aload in rolling terrain, in stop-and-go traffic, orwhen you need improved low-speed control, suchas when parking. The purpose of the tow/haulmode is to do the following:

• Reduce the frequency and improve thepredictability of transmission shifts whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feel when pullinga heavy trailer or a large or heavy load aswhen the vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speed whilerequiring less throttle pedal activity whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.


Tow/haul is designed to be most effective whenthe vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross CombinationWeight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of theTrailer” later in this section.

Press this button at the end of the shift lever toenable/disable the tow/haul mode.

A light on the instrumentpanel will illuminateto indicate thattow/haul mode hasbeen selected.

The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haulevery time it is started.

Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavyload or with no trailer will cause reduced fueleconomy and unpleasant engine and transmissiondriving characteristics, but will not causedamage.

Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightlyloaded or with no trailer at all will not causedamage. However, there is no benefit to theselection of tow/haul when the vehicle is unloaded.Such a selection when unloaded may result inunpleasant engine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fuel economy.Tow/haul is recommended only when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.


Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determine how muchyour vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehiclemodel and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. **GCWR

Escalade 2WD 6.2L 3.42 7,400 lbs (3 356 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)

Escalade AWD 6.2L 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)

Escalade ESV AWD 6.2L 3.42 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)

**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle shouldnot be exceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us atthe address listed in your Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information Booklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 366 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B),up to a maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weightcarrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) shouldbe 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B), up to the maximum of 1,000 lbs(454 kg) with a weight distributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch ball closestto the vehicle. This will help reduce the effectof trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.


After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s abilityto carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce your trailering capacity morethan the total of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axleand 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. Ithas a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWRof 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greaterthan just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 timesas much. The weight at the rear axle couldbe 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings thetotal to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,but within the limit for RGAWR as well. Thevehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equippedwith some of the latest options and you have afront seat passenger and two rear seat passengerswith some luggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to thefront axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rearaxle weight.


Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You maygo further and think you must limit tongueweight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoidexceeding GVWR. But, you must still considerthe effect on the rear axle. Because your rearaxle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you canonly put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axlewithout exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongueweight is about 1.5 times the actual weight.Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves youwith being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) oftongue weight. Since tongue weight is usuallyat least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight,you can expect that the largest trailer your vehiclecan properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification label at the rear edge of thedriver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 366. Then be sure you don’t go overthe GVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR,including the weight of the trailer tongue. If you usea weight distributing hitch, make sure you don’tgo over the rear axle limit before you applythe weight distribution spring bars.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch.


Weight-Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches

When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitchmust be adjusted so that the distance (A) remainsthe same both before and after coupling thetrailer to the tow vehicle.

If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper couldbe damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there isample room when turning to avoid contact betweenthe trailer and the bumper.

If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded,will weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sureto use a properly mounted weight-distributinghitch and sway control of the proper size.This equipment is very important for propervehicle loading and good handling when driving.You should always use a sway control if yourtrailer will weigh more than these limits. You canask a hitch dealer about sway controls.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chainsunder the tongue of the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your rig. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

If you are towing a trailer up to 5,000 lbs (900 kg)with a factory-installed step bumper, you mayattach the safety chains to the attaching points onthe bumper. If you are towing a trailer up toyour vehicle’s trailer rating limit, you may attachthe safety chains to the attaching point on the hitchplatform. If you are towing with an aftermarkethitch, follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chains.

(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle


Always leave just enough slack so you can turnwith your rig. Never allow safety chains to dragon the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes — andthey must be adequate. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintain them properly.Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,your trailer brake system cannot tap into thevehicle’s hydraulic brake system.

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window openand you pull a trailer with your vehicle,carbon monoxide (CO) could come intoyour vehicle. You can not see or smellCO. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath. See Engine Exhaust on page 153.



To maximize your safety when towinga trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessary repairsbefore starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear-most windows closed.• If exhaust does come into your vehicle

through a window in the rear oranother opening, drive with your front,main heating or cooling system onand with the fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh, outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use the climate controlsetting for maximum air because itonly recirculates the air inside yourvehicle. See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 212.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig.


Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling andbraking with the added weight of the trailer. Andalways keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.


When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,a lower gear selection if the transmission shiftstoo often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions).

You may also want to activate the tow/haulmode if the transmission shifts too often.See “Tow/Haul Mode” earlier.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphillgrades, consider the following: Engine coolant ator near sea level will boil at a lower temperaturethan at higher altitudes. If you turn your engineoff immediately after towing at high altitudeon steep uphill grades, your vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked (preferably onlevel ground) with the automatic transmissionin PARK (P) for at least five minutes beforeturning the engine off. If you do get the overheatwarning, see Engine Overheating on page 418.


Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet.2. Have someone place chocks under the

trailer wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release

the regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:• start your engine,• shift into a gear, and• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of

the chocks.4. Stop and have someone pick up and store

the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brakesystem. Each of these is covered in this manual,and the Index will help you find them quickly.If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review thesesections before you start your trip.Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.


Trailer Wiring HarnessHeavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package

Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wiretrailer towing harness. This harness with aseven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connectoris attached to the rear bumper beam. It is locatednext to the integrated trailer hitch.

The seven-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red w/ Black Stripe: Battery Feed*

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits are installed inthe underhood electrical center, but the circuits arenot connected. They should be installed by yourdealer or a qualified service center.

If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,press the tow/haul mode button located at theend of the shift lever. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly charge the battery.If the trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, youcan turn on the headlamps as a second wayto boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.


Electric Brake Control WiringProvisionsThese wiring provisions are included with yourvehicle as part of the heavy-duty trailer wiringpackage. These provisions are for an electricbrake controller. The red/black stripe power feedwill not be connected to the battery until thering terminal is unstowed and connected to theunderhood electrical center. The instrumentpanel contains blunt cut wires near the datalink connector for the trailer brake controller.The harness contains the following wires:

• Dark Blue: Auxiliary

• Red/Black: Battery

• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch

• White: Ground

It should be installed by your dealer or aqualfiied service center.

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch loads from theCargo Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is themaximum weight of the load your vehicle cancarry. It doesn’t include the weight of the peopleinside. But you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg)for each seat. The total cargo load must notbe more than your vehicle’s CWR.

Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, sothat you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR.If you are using a weight-distributing hitch, weighthe vehicle without the spring bars in place.

You’ll get the best performance if you spreadout the weight of your load the right way, and ifyou choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Traileron page 375.


Service .........................................................392Accessories and Modifications ....................393California Proposition 65 Warning ...............393Doing Your Own Service Work ...................394Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle .......................................395Fuel ..............................................................395

Gasoline Octane ........................................395Gasoline Specifications ...............................395California Fuel ............................................396Additives ....................................................396Fuels in Foreign Countries .........................397Filling the Tank ..........................................398Filling a Portable Fuel Container ................400

Checking Things Under the Hood ..............400Hood Release ............................................401Engine Compartment Overview ...................402Engine Oil ..................................................403Engine Oil Life System ...............................406Engine Air Cleaner/Filter .............................408Automatic Transmission Fluid .....................411Engine Coolant ...........................................415

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap .............418Engine Overheating ....................................418Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ......................................421Cooling System ..........................................422Engine Fan Noise ......................................427Power Steering Fluid ..................................427Windshield Washer Fluid ............................428Brakes .......................................................429Battery .......................................................433Jump Starting .............................................434

All-Wheel Drive ............................................438Rear Axle .....................................................439Front Axle ....................................................440Headlamp Aiming ........................................441Bulb Replacement ........................................445

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ......445Back-Up Lamps ..........................................445License Plate Lamp ....................................447Replacement Bulbs ....................................447

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ........448

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care


Tires .............................................................450Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................451Tire Terminology and Definitions ................453Inflation - Tire Pressure ..............................456High-Speed Operation ................................458Tire Pressure Monitor System ....................458Tire Inspection and Rotation .......................463When It Is Time for New Tires ...................465Buying New Tires .......................................465Different Size Tires and Wheels .................467Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................468Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .............469Wheel Replacement ...................................470Tire Chains ................................................471If a Tire Goes Flat .....................................472Changing a Flat Tire ..................................473Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...........474Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ........................................478Secondary Latch System ............................484Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......488Spare Tire ..................................................492

Appearance Care .........................................492Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ...........492Fabric/Carpet ..............................................494Leather ......................................................495Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ............................495Wood Panels .............................................496Speaker Covers .........................................496Care of Safety Belts ...................................496Weatherstrips .............................................496Washing Your Vehicle ................................496Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................497Finish Care ................................................497Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ..........................................498Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..........498Tires ..........................................................499Sheet Metal Damage ..................................499Finish Damage ...........................................500Underbody Maintenance .............................500Chemical Paint Spotting .............................500Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............501



Vehicle Identification ...................................502Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............502Service Parts Identification Label ................502

Electrical System .........................................502Add-On Electrical Equipment ......................502Windshield Wiper Fuses .............................503Power Windows and Other Power Options ....503

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................503Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................504Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........506Underhood Fuse Block ...............................507

Capacities and Specifications .....................512



ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs.You will get genuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:


Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.


Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attemptany vehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused.If you use the wrong fasteners, partscan later break or fall off. You couldbe hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to serviceyour vehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 553.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work,see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 104.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 531.


Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse premium unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. You may also useregular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may beslightly reduced, and you may notice a slightaudible knocking noise, commonly referred to asspark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you maynotice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. Ifthis occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you mightdamage your engine. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 396 for additional information.


California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 232. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your GM dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must notbe used in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.


Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated forlow emissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuelmay be hard to find. Never use leaded gasolineor any other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,or contact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.


Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle — this is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the centerof the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to theleft (counterclockwise). The fuel cap has aspring in it; if the cap is released too soon,it will spring back to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.


{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 496.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to theright (clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure thecap is fully installed. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 232.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pumpor by notifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sureto get the right type. Your dealer can getone for you. If you get the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light andmay damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 232.


Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other thanthe ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.


Hood ReleaseTo open the hood do the following:

1. Pull the handlewith this symbolon it. It is locatedinside the vehicle tothe lower left ofthe steering wheel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locatethe secondary hood release, near the centerof the grille.

3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.

4. Lift the hood.Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then pull down thehood and close it firmly.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 6.2L engine here is what you will see:


A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 408.

B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 408.

C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Cooling System on page 422 and CoolantSurge Tank Pressure Cap on page 418.

D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 434.

E. Battery. See Battery on page 433.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add

Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 403.G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Out of View).

See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 411.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND)(Out of View). See Jump Starting on page 434.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oilon page 403.

J. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View).See Cooling System on page 422.

K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).See Power Steering Fluid on page 427.

L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 429.

M. Underhood Fuse Block. See UnderhoodFuse Block on page 507.

N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 428.

Engine OilIf the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL messageappears on the Driver Information Center (DIC),it means you need to check your engine oillevel right away. For more information, seeENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 245.

You should check your engine oil level regularly;this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil everytime you get fuel. In order to get an accuratereading, the oil must be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.


The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 402for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind ofoil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 512.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartmentOverview on page 402for the location ofthe engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou are through.


What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.


If you are in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor your engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need forgood performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 245. Change your oilas soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the oil life systemmay not indicate that an oil change is necessaryfor over a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will performthis work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system. It is also important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, youmust change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed.


How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates whento change your engine oil and filter basedon vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculate when thenext oil change is required. If a situation occurswhere you change your oil prior to a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message being turnedon, reset the system.

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% afterevery oil change. It will not reset itself. To resetthe Engine Oil Life System, do the following:

1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button onthe DIC for more than five seconds. The oillife will change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle,the Engine Oil Life System has not reset.Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment.If you change your own oil, be sure to drain allthe oil from the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring iton the ground, into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking itto a place that collects used oil. If you havea problem properly disposing of used oil, askyour dealer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.


Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 402 for thelocation of the engineair cleaner/filter andthe air filter restrictionindicator, if thevehicle has one.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterIf your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator,it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filterneeds to be replaced. On vehicles with arestriction indicator, you should inspect theair filter restriction indicator at every oil changeand replace the engine air cleaner/filter whenthe indicator tells you to.

On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 517 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.


How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterVehicles With an Air FilterRestriction IndicatorLocate the air filter restriction indicator on theengine air cleaner/filter cover. When the indicatorturns black or is in the red/orange “change”zone, replace the filter and reset the indicator.See the steps following to replace the engineair cleaner/filter and to reset the air filterrestriction indicator.

Vehicles Without an Air FilterRestriction IndicatorTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engineair cleaner/filter from the vehicle by followingstep 1 through 6. When you have the engineair cleaner/filter removed, lightly shake it to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filterand Resetting the Air Filter RestrictionIndicator

1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 402.

2. Loosen the four screws on the cover ofthe housing and lift up the cover.


3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from thehousing. Care should be taken to dislodgeas little dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealingsurfaces and the housing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator,if the vehicle has one, by pressing thetop button on the indicator.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.


Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidIt is usually not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leakis the only reason for fluid loss. If you suspecta small leak, then use the following checkingprocedures to check the fluid level. However,if there is a large leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to a dealershipservice department and have it repaired beforedriving the vehicle further.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listedin the Maintenance Schedule. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 517. Be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine part or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if you checkyour transmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level, prepare yourvehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park your vehicle ona level surface. Keep the engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake and place theshift lever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, movethe shift lever through each gear range,pausing for about three seconds in eachrange. Then, move the shift lever backto PARK (P).


4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm)for at least one minute. Slowly releasethe brake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running and press theTrip/Fuel button until TRANS TEMP(Transmission Temperature) displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determineand perform the appropriate check procedure.If the TRANS TEMP reading is not withinthe required temperature ranges, allowthe vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicleuntil the appropriate transmission fluidtemperature is reached.

Cold Check ProcedureUse this procedure only as a reference todetermine if the transmission has enough fluid tobe operated safely until a hot check procedurecan be made. The hot check procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluid level. Performthe hot check procedure at the first opportunity.

Use this cold check procedure to check fluid levelwhen the transmission temperature is between80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).

1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear ofthe engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

The dipstick handlehas this graphic. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 402for more information.

2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in allthe way, wait three seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. Repeat the check procedureto verify the reading.


5. If the fluid level is below the COLD checkband, add only enough fluid as necessaryto bring the level into the COLD band.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunityafter the transmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between 160°F to200°F (71°C to 93°C).

7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Hot Check ProcedureUse this procedure to check the transmission fluidlevel when the transmission fluid temperature isbetween 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).

The hot check is the most accurate method tocheck the fluid level. The hot check should beperformed at the first opportunity in order toverify the cold check. The fluid level rises as fluidtemperature increases, so it is important to ensurethe transmission temperature is within range.

1. Locate the transmission dipstick at therear of the engine compartment, on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

The dipstick handle hasthis graphic. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 402 formore information.


2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in allthe way, wait three seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. Repeat the check procedureto verify the reading.

5. Safe operating level is within the HOTcrosshatch band on the dipstick. If the fluidlevel is not within the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature is between 160°Fand 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or drain fluidas necessary to bring the level into the HOTband. If the fluid level is low, add only enoughfluid to bring the level into the HOT band.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.


Consistency of ReadingsAlways check the fluid level at least twice usingthe procedures described. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintaining proper fluidlevel. If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutesor longer to obtain an accurate reading becauseof residual fluid draining down the dipsticktube. If inconsistent readings persist, check thetransmission breather to be sure it is clean andnot clogged. If readings are still inconsistent,contact your dealer.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL®

extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling systemand how to add coolant when it is low. If youhave a problem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating on page 418.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.


What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use onlythe proper mixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 527 for more information.


Checking CoolantThe coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 402 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should beat the FULL COLD mark.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure itis hand-tight and fully seated.


Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must befully installed on the coolant surge tank. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 402 formore information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 230.

In addition, the messages ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, or ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED couldappear in the Driver Information Center (DIC)on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 245.


If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine if you see orhear steam coming from it. Just turn it offand get everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools down. Wait until there is nosign of steam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.



See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 421 forinformation on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 421 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.


If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineThe ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINEor the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolant condition,can indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Traileron page 375.

If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE message with no sign of steam, try thisfor a minute or so:

1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on,turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.


If the warning continues, pull over, stop, andpark your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehiclehas an engine-driven cooling fan, push downthe accelerator until the engine speed is abouttwice as fast as normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while you are parked.

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehiclehas an electric cooling fan, idle the engine forat least five minutes while you are parked.

If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down. Also, see “Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists andthe REDUCED ENGINE POWER message isdisplayed, an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylinders helps preventengine damage. In this mode, you will notice aloss in power and engine performance. Thisoperating mode allows your vehicle to be drivento a safe place in an emergency. Driving extendedmiles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheatprotection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil willbe severely degraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil and reset the oillife system. See Engine Oil on page 403.


Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood,here is what you will see:

A. Coolant Surge TankB. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fan

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.Check the coolant level after the system coolsdown. Some amount of coolant may be lost dueto overheating.


The coolant level should be at or above theFULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressure cap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 421 for informationon driving to a safe place in an emergency.Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.


How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not at or above theFULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolanton page 415 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure,and if you turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.


{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater coreand other parts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do notspill coolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure cap whenthe cooling system,including the coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upperradiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap byslowly turning the pressure cap counterclockwiseabout one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means there is still somepressure left.


2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the FULL COLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper mixture tothe coolant surge tank until the level reachesthe FULL COLD mark.


5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut offand the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeatcoolant fill procedure steps 1 through 6.

Engine Fan NoiseYour vehicle has electric cooling fans, you mayhear the fans spinning at low speed duringmost everyday driving. The fans may turn off if nocooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading,trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures,or if you are operating your air conditioningsystem, the fans may change to high speed andyou may hear an increase in fan noise. Thisis normal and indicates that the cooling systemis functioning properly. The fans will change tolow speed when additional cooling is no longerrequired.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartmentOverview onpage 402 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.


How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.If necessary, add only enough fluid to bringthe level up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 527.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidYour vehicle has a low washer fluid messagethat comes on when the washer fluid is low.The message is displayed for 15 seconds at thestart of each ignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID message is displayed,you will need to add washer fluid to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.


Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 402for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 402 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking outof the brake system. If it is, you should haveyour brake system fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.


So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then youwill have too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking Brake Fluid”in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, thebrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 228.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 517.

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without takingoff the cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be above MIN.If it is not, have yourbrake system checkedto see if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but notover the MAX mark.


What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 527.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap andthe area around the cap before removing it.This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in yourbrake system, your brakes may not workwell, or they may not even work at all.This could cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, justa few drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake systemcan damage brake system parts sobadly that they will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 496.


Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound meansthat soon your brakes will not work well.That could lead to an accident. When youhear the brake wear warning sound, haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapidincrease in pedal travel. This could be a sign ofbrake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your discbrakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality andwork well together if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. Your vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality GM brake parts.


When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — besure you get new approved GM replacement parts.If you do not, your brakes may no longer workproperly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 402 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep yourbattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 434 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.


Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has rundown, you may want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure.Put the automatic transmission in PARK (P)or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.


Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories pluggedinto the cigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radio and allthe lamps that are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jumpstarting terminal and a remote negative (−)jump starting terminal. You should alwaysuse these remote terminals instead ofthe terminals on the battery.The remote positive (+) terminal, if equipped,is located under a red plastic cover atthe positive battery post. To uncover theremote positive (+) terminal, open thered plastic cover.

The remote negative (−) terminal is a studlocated on the right front of the engine,where the negative battery cable attaches.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 402 for more information on thelocation of the remote positive (+) andremote negative (−) terminals.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even whenthe engine is not running and can injureyou. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle.But if a battery has filler caps, be surethe right amount of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could bepresent.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or onyour skin, flush the place with waterand get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.


6. Connect the redpositive (+) cableto the positive (+)terminal of thevehicle withthe dead battery.Use a remotepositive (+) terminalif the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal.Connect it to the positive (+) terminal ofthe good battery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery.It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to the remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the remote negative (−) terminal,on the vehicle with the dead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.


Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles do the following:1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from

the vehicle that had the bad battery.2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from

the vehicle with the good battery.3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the

vehicle with the good battery.4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the

other vehicle.5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover,

if equipped, to its original position.

All-Wheel DriveTransfer CaseIf your vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel Drive,be sure to perform the lubricant checks describedin this section. There are two additional systemsthat need lubrication.

When to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 517.

Jumper Cable Removal


How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluidduring production. They are not filled to reacha certain level. When checking the fluid level onany axle, variations in the readings can be causedby factory fill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehiclehas just been driven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower than normal becausefluid has traveled out along the axle tubesand has not drained back to the sump area.

(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug


Therefore, a reading taken five minutes after thevehicle has been driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle that has beenstationary for an hour or two. Remember thatthe rear axle assembly must be supported toget a true reading.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

The proper level is from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch(1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on the rear axle.Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.


Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, the vehicle shouldbe on a level surface.


A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant:

• When the differential is cold, add enoughlubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm)to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.

• When the differential is at operatingtemperature (warm), add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.


Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim of the headlamps have beenpreset at the factory and should need no furtheradjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the aim of the headlamps may be affected andadjustment may be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may mean the vertical aim of yourheadlamps needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken toyour dealer for service if the headlamps need tobe adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aimthe headlamps as described in the followingprocedure.


The vehicle should be properly prepared asfollows:

• The vehicle should be placed so theheadlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on alevel surface which is level all the way tothe wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice,or mud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled andall other work stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

• The vehicle should be normally loadedwith a full tank of fuel and one personor 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• The spare tire is in its proper location inthe vehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 401 for more information.

2. Locate the centerof the projector lensof the low-beamheadlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to thecenter of the projector lens of the low-beamheadlamp. Record the distance.


4. At the wall or other flat surface, measurefrom the ground upward (A) to the recordeddistance from Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on thewall or flat surface the width of the vehicleat the height of the mark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and placea piece of cardboard or equivalent in frontof the headlamp not being adjusted. Thisallows only the beam of light from theheadlamp being adjusted to be seen onthe flat surface.


7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned witha E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontaltape line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwiseto raise or lower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.


Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 447.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed inthis section, contact your dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a very highvoltage. If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have your dealer ora qualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

Back-Up Lamps

To replace this bulb,do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgateon page 126 for more information.


2. Remove the twoscrews from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until youdisengage the inner pins on the taillampassembly from the vehicle.

4. Press the release tab, if the bulb socket hasone, and turn the socket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillamp assembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.

6. Press a new bulb into the socket, insertthe socket into the taillamp assembly andturn the socket clockwise into the taillampassembly until it clicks.

7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. Whenreinstalling, make sure to line up the pinson the taillamp assembly with the vehicle.If you do not line up the pins correctly,you will not be able install the taillampassembly properly.

If you need to replace the taillamp, stoplamp,or turn signal, you will need to see your dealerfor service.


License Plate Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps to the molding that is partof the liftgate.

2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the molding opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse steps 1– 3 to reinstall the licenseplate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up Lamp 7440

License Plate Lamp W5W

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.


Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 517.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. To replace thewiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connectoraway from the windshield. 2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of

the blade, and rotate the blade assemblyaway from the arm connector.


3. Install the new blade onto the arm connectorand make sure the grooved areas are fully setin the locked position.

For the proper type and size, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 529.

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out

of the park rest position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from thebackglass. The backglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, so care shouldbe used when pulling it away from the vehicle.

3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pullit off of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper armin position and push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assembly to thepark rest position.


TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty andwhere to obtain service, see your GM Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 366.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 458for inflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed driving.


22-Inch TiresIf your vehicle has the optional 22-inchP285/45R22 size tires, they are classified astouring tires and are designed for on road use.The low-profile, wide tread design is notrecommended for off-road driving. See Off-RoadDriving on page 334, for additional information.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded intothe sidewall. The following illustration is anexample of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire


(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date of manufacture.(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information, see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 468.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 456and Loading Your Vehicle on page 366.

Tire SizeThe following examples show the different partsof a tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire


(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75,as shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric)tire illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewallis 75% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of atire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.


Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 456.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 366.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 366.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 366.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for atire at the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.


Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 366.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucksand multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 456 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 366.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 465.


UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 468.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 366.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire sizeand recommended inflation pressure. See“Tire and Loading Information Label” underLoading Your Vehicle on page 366.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards


A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), belowthe driver’s door lock post (striker). This labellists your vehicle’s original equipment tiresand their recommended cold tire inflationpressures. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 366.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.Do not forget to check the spare tire.For additional information regarding thespare tire, see Spare Tire on page 492.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them.Radial tires may look properly inflated evenwhen they’re underinflated. Check the tire’sinflation pressure when the tires are cold.Cold means your vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low, add air until youreach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.


High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain ontires. Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have acrash and you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that a vehicle canbe driven at high speeds, make sure thetires are rated for high speed operation,in excellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure forthe vehicle load.

If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P285/45R22 sizetires and you will be driving at high speeds, speedsof 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, set the coldinflation pressure to 3 psi (20 kPa) above therecommended tire pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information Label. When you end thishigh-speed driving, return the tires to the coldinflation pressure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 366 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 456.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted on each tire and wheel assembly,except the spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tires and transmittire pressure readings to a receiver located inthe vehicle.


The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a lowtire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle hasthe Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver mayalso check tire pressure levels using the DIC.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol located on the instrument panelcluster. If your vehicle has the DIC feature, amessage to check the pressure in a specific tirewill also appear on the DIC display. The low tirepressure warning symbol on the instrument panelcluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningmessage on the DIC display will appear at eachignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displays seeDIC Operation and Displays on page 240 andDIC Warnings and Messages on page 245.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the tire pressure monitor light, located onthe instrument panel cluster, and the CHECKTIRE PRESSURE message will appear when thevehicle is first started and then turn off as youstart to drive the vehicle. This could be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures are getting lowand need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the propertire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with atire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tirepressure telltale whenone or more of yourtires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.


Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the systemis not operating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately one minuteand then remain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternatetires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning messageand low tire pressure light (telltale) will comeon each time the vehicle is started until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflation pressure.

The Tire and Loading Information label (tireinformation placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when they arecold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 456.For the location of the tire and loading informationlabel, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 366.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 463 and Tires on page 450.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.


Resetting the TPMS Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tiresor replace one or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need to be matchedto the new tire/wheel position. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver’s side front tire, passengersside front tire, passengers side rear tire, anddriver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostictool. See your GM dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to matchall four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel,or more than five minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matching process stopsand you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process isoutlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS message displays.

4. Press the set/reset button. The horn willsound twice to indicate the TPMS receiveris ready, and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage will display.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valvecap stem. Activate the TPMS sensor byincreasing or decreasing the tire’s airpressure for five seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp, which maketake up to 30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheel position.To decrease air-pressure out of a tire youcan use the pointed end of the valve cap,a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.


7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp forthe driver’s side rear tire, the horn chirpwill sound two more times to signal thetire learning mode is no longer active.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.

11. Set all four tires to the recommendedair pressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will bedisplayed on the DIC screen. This message shouldgo off once you re-install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and Industryand Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:


2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complieswith RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment.


Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 465and Wheel Replacement on page 470 formore information.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tightenthe cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 473.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 517.

When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always usethe correct rotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and rear inflation pressures as shown onthe tire and loading information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 366 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 456, for more information.


Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) will need to have the TPMSsensors reset after a tire rotation. See “TPMSSensor Identification Codes” under Tire PressureMonitor System on page 458.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 512.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel todo this; but be sure to use a scraper orwire brush later, if needed, to get all therust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 473.


When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.Some commercial trucktires may not havetreadwear indicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.


If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by anMS for mud and snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 451 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the samesize, brand, and type tires on all wheels.



Your vehicle may have a different sizespare than the road tires (those originallyinstalled on your vehicle). When new, yourvehicle included a spare tire and wheelassembly with a similar overall diameteras your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,so it is all right to drive on it. Becausethis spare was developed for use on yourvehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly,causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tireswith the wheels on your vehicle.


If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)as your vehicle’s original tires.Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires maygive a low-pressure warning that is higher or lowerthan the proper warning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 458.Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 366,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a differentsize than your original equipment wheelsand tires, this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.

Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systemssuch as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 465 andAccessories and Modifications on page 393for additional information.


Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),which grades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies onlyto vehicles sold in the United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls of most passengercar tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires with nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.


Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at the factory togive you the longest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheel alignmentand tire balancing will not be necessary ona regular basis. However, if you notice unusualtire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or theother, the alignment may need to be checked.If you notice your vehicle vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, your tires and wheels mayneed to be rebalanced. See your dealer forproper diagnosis.


Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keepcoming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them onlywith new GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 473 for moreinformation.


Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used ona vehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose controlof your vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash. Use another type oftraction device only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on your vehicleand tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage toyour vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust orremove the device if it is contacting yourvehicle, and do not spin your wheels.If you do find traction devices that willfit, install them on the rear tires.


If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to usethe jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.


Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place.Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 186for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.


When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need to change a flat tireis stored under the storage tray, which is locatedon the driver’s side trim panel (over the rearwheelhouse).

1. Remove the tray to access the tools bypulling up on the finger depression underthe jack symbol.

Regular Wheelbase shown,Extended Wheelbase similar.


2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain thetool bag by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Turn the knob (A) on the jackcounterclockwise to release the jack andwheel blocks from the bracket.

4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer by turning the wing nut (C)counterclockwise.

The tools you will be using include the following:

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Jack Handle

D. Jack HandleExtensions

E. Wheel Wrench


To access the spare tire, refer to the followinggraphics and instructions:

A. Hoist AssemblyB. Hoist ShaftC. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/HoleD. Jack Handle

ExtensionsE. Wheel WrenchF. Hoist Cable

G. Tire RetainerH. Spare Tire (Valve

Stem Pointed Down)I. Hoist Shaft

Access HoleJ. Hoist End of

Extension ToolK. Spare Tire Lock

1. To access the spare tire hoist cover, you willfirst need to remove the hitch cover. Remove itby turning the two fasteners located at thebottom of the cover counterclockwise and thenpull the cover down and rotate towards you.

2. Open the hoist shaft access cover (C) on thebumper to access the spare tire lock (K).

3. Insert the ignition key, turn it clockwise andthen pull it to remove the spare tire lock.

4. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D)and wheel wrench (E) as shown.


5. Insert the openend of theextension (J)through the hole inthe rear bumper (I)(hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbedsquare end of the extension is used to lowerthe spare tire.

6. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise tolower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continueto turn the wheel wrench until the spare tirecan be pulled out from under the vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,the secondary latch is engaged causingthe tire not to lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 484 for more information.

7. Use the wheelwrench hook thatallows you topull the hoist cabletowards you, toassist in reachingthe spare tire.

8. Tilt the tireretainer (G) atthe end of thecable when thetire has beenlowered, so itcan be pulledup through thewheel opening.

9. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.


Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireUse the following pictures and instructions toremove the flat tire and raise the vehicle.

1. Loosen the plastic nut caps on the bolt-onwheel cover by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. If needed, finish looseningthem by hand. The nut caps will not come off.

2. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the cover until it comes off.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do not removethe wheel nuts yet.


A. Front PositionB. Rear Position

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)


Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a fronttire of the vehicle, you will need to use thejack handle and only one jack handleextension. Attach the wheel wrench to the jackhandle extension. Attach the jack handle tothe jack. Position the jack (A) on the framebehind the flat tire where the frame sectionsoverlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwiseto raise the vehicle. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clear the ground.

Front Position


Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tireof the vehicle, you will need to use the jackhandle (B) and both jack handle extensions (C).Attach the wheel wrench (D) to the jack handleextensions (C). Attach the jack handle (B) tothe jack (A). Use the jacking pad provided onthe rear axle. Turn the wheel wrench (D)clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clear the ground.

5. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.

Rear Position


{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after a time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed,to get all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rustor dirt from thewheel bolts,mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel aftermounting the spare tire.

9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then usethe wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until thewheel is held against the hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.


{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 512for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 512for the wheel nut torque specification.

11. Tighten thenuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown byturning the wheelwrench clockwise.

When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire,you must also reinstall the bolt-on hub cap.Align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nutsand then tighten by hand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten.


Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly which has a secondary latch system.It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenlyfalling off your vehicle. For the secondary latchto work, the spare tire must be installed withthe valve stem pointing down. See Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 488.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted below.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Check under thevehicle to see if thecable end is visible.If the cable is notvisible, proceedto Step 6.


2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cableby turning the wheel wrench clockwiseuntil you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.If the spare tire lowers to the ground,continue with Step 5 of Removing the SpareTire and Tools on page 474.

5. If the spare tire does not lower, turn the wheelwrench counterclockwise until approximately6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,with the backs facing each other.

7. Place the bottomedge of the jack (A)on the wheelblocks (B),separating them sothat the jack isbalanced securely.


8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheelwrench to the jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicle toward thefront of the rear bumper.

9. Position the center lift point of the jack underthe center of the spare tire.

10. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the end fitting.

11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tirestops moving upward and is held firmly inplace so that the secondary latch has releasedand the spare tire is balancing on the jack.


12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from under the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack with the other hand.

14. Use one hand to push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out from under thespare tire with the other hand. If the spare tireis hanging from the cable, insert the hoistend of the extension and wheel wrench intothe hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turnthe wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare tire the rest of the way.

15. Tilt the tire retainer atthe end of the cableand pull it throughthe wheel opening.Pull the tire out fromunder the vehicle.

16. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft holein the bumper clockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hanging underthe vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spareor flat tire using the hoist assembly until ithas been replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 478.


Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flattire under your vehicle for an extended periodof time or with the valve stem pointing up maydamage the wheel. Always stow the wheel withthe valve stem pointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in thespare tire carrier. Refer to the following graphicsand instructions to help you:

A. Hoist AssemblyB. Hoist ShaftC. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/HoleD. Jack Handle

ExtensionsE. Wheel WrenchF. Hoist CableG. Tire Retainer

H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire(Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist ShaftAccess Hole

J. Hoist End ofExtension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock


1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of thevehicle with the valve stem pointed down andto the rear.

2. Tilt the tireretainer (G)downward andthrough thewheel opening.Make sure theretainer is fullyseated acrossthe undersideof the wheel.

3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D)and wheel wrench (E) as shown.

4. Insert the open endof the extension (J)through the holein the rearbumper (I) (hoistshaft access hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure theretainer is seated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear two clicks or feel itskip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.


7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.

10. Reinstall the hitch cover.

To store the tools, do the following.

A. Wheel BlocksB. Tool Bag with

Jack ToolsC. Retaining BracketD. Wing Nut Retaining

Tool Bag

E. JackF. Wing Nut

Retaining WheelBlocks

G. Wing Nut on Jack

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle,and jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).


2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E)together with the wing nut (F).

3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A)in the driver’s side trim panel over thewheelhouse.

4. Turn the wing nut (G) clockwise until thejack is secured tight in the mountingbracket. Be sure to position the holes inthe base of the jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten thetool bag (B) on the stud and turn the wingnut (D) clockwise to secure.

6. Return the storage tray to its original storedposition.

Regular Wheelbase shown,Extended Wheelbase similar.


Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated sparetire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so checkits inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 456 and Loading Your Vehicleon page 366 for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle. For instructionon how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, seeRemoving the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tireon page 478 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 488.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced assoon as you can and installed back onto yourvehicle. This way, a spare tire will be availablein case you need it again.

Your vehicle may have a different size sparetire than the road tires, those originally installedon your vehicle. This spare tire was developedfor use on your vehicle, so it is all right todrive on it.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they werenot intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.


Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and the rearwindow defogger. When cleaning the glass onyour vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that maybecome concentrated in your vehicle’s breathingspace. Before using cleaners, read and adhereto all safety instructions on the label. Whilecleaning your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp objectto remove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.


Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.


LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used. Allow the leather todry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Neveruse steam to clean leather. Never use spot liftersor spot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leatherand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened witha mild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleanersand coatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your interior andare not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase glosson your instrument panel. The increase ingloss may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to seethrough the windshield under certain conditions.


Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapywater (use mild dish washing soap). Dry thewood immediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so thatthe speaker will not be damaged. Clean spotswith just water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 527.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays ofthe sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residuecompletely. GM-approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 501.


Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleumbased, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents should be flushed promptlyand not allowed to dry on the surface, or they couldstain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois oran all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft clothand a car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 496.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 501.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishesthat are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle ina garage or covered whenever possible.


Windshield, Backglass, andWiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with afull-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshieldis clean if beads do not form when you rinse itwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to thewiper blades and affect their performance.Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with acloth soaked in full-strength windshield washersolvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may be equipped with eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.


Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle throughan automatic car wash that has siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes, you coulddamage the aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Never drive a vehicle equippedwith aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damagethe surface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.


Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your GM dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system eventhough they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materialsfrom the underbody with plain water. Cleanany areas where mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealeror an underbody car washing system can dothis for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removesspots and stains fromcarpets, vinyl, andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.


Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You cansee it if you look through the windshield fromoutside your vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Certification/Tire and Service Parts labelsand the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:• VIN• Model designation• Paint information• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical SystemAdd-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage wouldn’t becovered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 104.


Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiperwill stop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and not snow,etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. If the current load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opens andthen closes after a cool down period, protectingthe circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of fires causedby electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road anddon’t have a spare fuse, you can borrowone that has the same amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout — like the radio or cigarette lighter — anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.


Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block access door islocated on the driver’s outside edge of theinstrument panel.

Fuses Usage

LT DR Driver’s Side Power WindowCircuit Breaker

REAR SEAT Rear Seats

AUX PWR2 Rear Cargo Area Power Outlets

SWC BKLT Steering Wheel Controls Backlight

DDM Driver Door Module

CTSY Dome Lamps, Driver’s SideTurn Signal

LT STOP TRN Driver’s Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp

DIM Instrument Panel Back Lighting

RT STOP TRN Passenger’s Side Turn Signal,Stoplamp

BCM Body Control Module

UNLCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)

LCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)


Fuses Usage

STOP LAMPS Stoplamps, Center-High MountedStoplamp

REAR HVAC Rear Climate Controls

PDM Passenger Door Module, UniversalHome Remote System

AUX PWR Accessory Power Outlets

IS LPS Interior Lamps

UNLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)

OBS DET Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,Power Liftgate

LCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)

Fuses Usage

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

COOLEDSEATS Cooled Seats

DSM Driver Seat Module, RemoteKeyless Entry System

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DR Driver’s Door Harness Connection

BODY Harness Connector

BODY Harness Connector


Center Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe center instrument panel fuse block is locatedunderneath the instrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Top View

HarnessConnector Usage

BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2



HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3



BRAKECLUTCH Brake Clutch Harness Connector

SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option UpfitterHarness Connector


Circuit Breaker Usage

CB1 Passenger’s Side Power WindowCircuit Breaker

CB2 Passenger’s Seat Circuit Breaker

CB3 Driver’s Seat Circuit Breaker

CB4 Not Used

Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver’s side of the vehicle.To access the fuse/relay block, push in on the tabson the end of the fuse/relay block cover and lift.

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fusebetween your thumb and index finger and pullstraight out.


Fuses Usage

1 Not Used

2Electronic Stability SuspensionControl, Automatic Level ControlExhaust

Fuses Usage

3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

4 Engine Controls


Fuses Usage

5 Engine Control Module,Throttle Control

6 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

7 Front Washer

8 Oxygen Sensors

9 Anti-lock Brakes System 2

10 Trailer Back-up Lamps

11 Driver’s High IntensityDischarge Lamp

12 Engine Control Module (Battery)

13 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils(Right Side)

14 Transmission Control Module(Battery)

15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps

16 Passenger’s Side High IntensityDischarge Lamp

17 Air Conditioning Compressor

18 Oxygen Sensors

Fuses Usage

19 Transmission Controls (Ignition)

20 Fuel Pump

21 Not Used

22 Rear Washer

23 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils(Left Side)

24 Trailer Park Lamps

25 Driver’s Side Park Lamps

26 Passenger’s Side Park Lamps

27 Fog Lamps

28 Horn

29 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp Solenoid

30 Daytime Running Lamps

31 Driver’s Side High-Beam HeadlampSolenoid

32 Not Used

33 Sunroof


Fuses Usage

34 Key Ignition System, TheftDeterrent System

35 Windshield Wiper

36 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)

37 Electric Adjustable Pedals

38 Climate Controls (Battery)

39 Airbag System (Ignition)

40 Amplifier

41 Audio System

42 Not Used

43Miscellaneous (Ignition), RearVision Camera (If Equipped),Cooled Seats, Cruise Control

44 Liftgate Release

45 OnStar®, Rear Seat EntertainmentDisplay

Fuses Usage

46 Instrument Panel Cluster

47 Not Used

48 Heated Steering Wheel

49 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),Compass-Temperature Mirror

50 Rear Defogger

51 Airbag System (Battery)

52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)

53 Cigarette Lighter, AuxiliaryPower Outlet

54 Automatic Level Control CompressorRelay, SEO Upfitter Usage

55 Climate Controls (Ignition)

56 Engine Control Module, SecondaryFuel Pump (Ignition)


J-Case Fuses Usage

60 Cooling Fan 1

61 Automatic Level Control Compressor

62 Not Used

63 Cooling Fan 2

64 Anti-lock Brake System 1

65 Starter

66 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)

67 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1

68 Electric Running Boards

69 Heated Windshield Washer System

70 Not Used

71 Stud 1 (Trailer ConnectorBattery Power)

72 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1

73 Climate Control Blower

74 Power Liftgate Module

75 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2

Relays Usage

FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed

FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed

ENG EXH VLV Not Used

FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control

HDLP LO/HID Hi Intensity Discharge Headlamp

FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

STRTR Starter

PWR/TRN Powertrain

FUEL PMP Fuel Pump

PRK LAMP Parking Lamps

REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RUN/CRANK Switched Power


Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Regular 2.5 lbs 1.13 kg

Extended 2.8 lbs 1.3 kg

Cooling System 17.6 qt 16.7 L

Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 qt† 5.7 L†

Fuel Tank

Regular 26.0 gal 98.4 L

Extended 31.5 gal 119.2 L

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Replacement) 6.0 qt 5.7 L

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 qt 1.4 L

Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y

† Oil filter should be changed at every oil change. After refill, the level must be rechecked.Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating range.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 8 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)


Maintenance Schedule .................................514Introduction ................................................514Maintenance Requirements .........................514Your Vehicle and the Environment .............514Using the Maintenance Schedule ...............515Scheduled Maintenance ..............................517Additional Required Services ......................519Maintenance Footnotes ..............................521Owner Checks and Services ......................523

At Each Fuel Fill ........................................523At Least Once a Month ..............................524At Least Once a Year ................................524Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .........527Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ..................................529Engine Drive Belt Routing ..........................530Maintenance Record ...................................531

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule


Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?The Plan supplements your new vehiclewarranties. See your Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.


Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 366.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving on page 334.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 395.


The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 517 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 519 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 521 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 394.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 553.

Owner Checks and Services on page 523 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 529.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.


Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required foryour vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soonas possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if you are driving under thebest conditions, the engine oil life system maynot indicate that vehicle service is necessaryfor over a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 406 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.


Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 403. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 406. An Emission Control Service. • •

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 408. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 463 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 524.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See Additional Required Serviceson page 519. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Check transfer case fluid level and add fluid as needed. •


Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Vehicles without a filter restrictionindicator: Replace engine air cleanerfilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 408.

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service).See footnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

Change transfer case fluid.See footnote (m). • • •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect evaporative control system.An Emission Control Service.See footnotes † and (g).

• • •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (l).

•


Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage,transmission shift linkage, and parking brakecable guides. Control arm ball joints aremaintenance-free.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectpower steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Visually check constant velocity joints, rubberboots, and axle seals for leaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.


(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outertailgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel doorhinge, and folding seat hardware. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed toa corrosive environment. Applying silicone greaseon weatherstrips with a clean cloth will makethem last longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

(g) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up, routing, andcondition. Check that the purge valve worksproperly, if equipped. Replace as needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or

delivery service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 415 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(m) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinksand proper installation.


Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 527.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 403 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep your engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to your enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 415 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.


At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeTires on page 450 for further details. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 473.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil LifeSystem service notification. Check the tiresfor wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 463.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake andthe regular brake. See Parking Brakeon page 149.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The vehicle should start only in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.


Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 149.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shiftlever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only whenthe shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.


Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holdingability: With the engine running andtransmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly removefoot pressure from the regular brake pedal.Do this until the vehicle is held by the parkingbrake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.


Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.To determine the proper viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 403.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 415.


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.



Front andRear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Transfer Case

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid. Look for“Approved for the H-Specification”on the label.

Front AxlePropshaftSpline or

One-PiecePropshaft

Spline(Two-Wheel

Drive)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,in Canada 10953511) or lubricantmeeting requirements ofGM 9985830.

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).


Body DoorHinge Pins,

Tailgate Hingeand Linkage,

Folding Seats,and Fuel

Door Hinge


Outer TailgateHandle Pivot

Points


WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).


Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour GM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco®

Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25313348 A1519C

Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12571164 41-985

Wiper Blades (ITTA Type)

Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm) 15284095 —

Rear – 11.8 inches (30.0 cm) 15173728 —


Engine Drive Belt Routing


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 514.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 523 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




Customer Assistance and Information ........536Customer Satisfaction Procedure ................536Online Owner Center ..................................539Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ...........................539Customer Assistance Offices ......................540GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .........541Roadside Service .......................................541Courtesy Transportation ..............................545Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders .......................................547Collision Damage Repair ............................548

Reporting Safety Defects .............................552Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ......................552Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................552Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors .......................................553Service Publications Ordering

Information ..............................................553

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information


Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved byyour dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the CadillacCustomer Assistance Center, 24 hours a day,by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contactthe Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).This is available from the vehicle registrationor title, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, please rememberthat your concern will likely be resolved ata dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if you have a concern.


STEP THREE (US Owners): Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps One and Two, you should file withthe BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.


STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after the following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two.General Motors of Canada Limited wants youto be aware of its participation in a no-chargemediation/Arbitration program. General Motorsof Canada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before thearbiter. The program is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the final decision,should be completed in approximately 70 days.We believe our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to the Mediation/Arbitration Program atthe following address. Your inquiry shouldbe accompanied by your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1–163–0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner’s manual(United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who useText Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTYequipment available at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user can communicate withCadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)


Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

www.Cadillac.com1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmcanada.com1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800


GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside ServiceIn the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service ismore than an auto club or towing service. Itprovides every Cadillac owner with the advantageof contacting a Cadillac advisor and, in theU.S., where available, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-site service.

Each U.S. technician travels with a speciallyequipped service vehicle complete with thenecessary Cadillac parts and tools required tohandle most roadside repairs.


Who Is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period andin Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100. These servicesare provided at a nominal charge if the Cadillacis no longer covered by the warranties listedpreviously. Roadside Service is available only inthe United States and Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™Roadside Service provides several CadillacOwner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughoutyour Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site forthe following situations:

• Towing Service: Emergency towing from apublic roadway or highway to the nearestdealership for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud or snow.

• Battery Jump Starting: No-start occurrenceswhich require a battery jump start will becovered at no charge.

• Lock Out Assistance: To ensure security,the driver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out service isprovided. Lock-out service will be covered atno charge if you are unable to gain entryinto your vehicle. If your vehicle will notstart, Roadside Service will arrange to haveyour vehicle towed to the nearest authorizeddealership. In the US, replacement keysmade at the customer’s expense will bedelivered within 10 miles.


• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the US and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel maybe restricted. For safety reasons, propane andother alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only):Installation of your spare tire, in goodcondition, will be covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repairor replacement of the tire if not covered bya warrantable failure.

• Trip Interruption: If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty period.Items covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac

Roadside Service will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlightingyour choice of either the most direct route orthe most scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along withany helpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it is best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date. Triprouting requests will be limited to six percalendar year.

• Alternative Service: There may be timeswhen Roadside Service cannot providetimely assistance. Your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt toCadillac Roadside Service®.


Roadside Service AvailabilityWherever you drive in the United States orCanada, an advisor is available to assist you overthe phone. A dealer technician, if available, cantravel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km)radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have yourcar towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideService Representative:

• A description of the problem

• Name, home address, hometelephone number

• Location of your Cadillac and number youare calling from

• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), odometer reading, and date of delivery

While we hope you never have the occasion to useour service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we are only aphone call away. In the US or Canada, customerscall Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112.

Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or aconventional teletypewriter can communicate withCadillac by dialing from the United States orCanada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.

Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Service is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Cadillac and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Service programat any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Servicecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains or other traction devices.


Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(US) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the courtesy transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable when warranty repairs are required toassist in reducing your inconvenience.

Courtesy Transportation is not part of the newVehicle Limited Warranty and is available only atparticipating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.


Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle Service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires warranty repairs, andpublic transportation is used as “shuttle service,”the reimbursement is limited to the associatedshuttle allowance (contact your dealer) andmust be supported by original receipts.

In addition, in the U.S., should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expensesmay be available. Claim amounts should reflectactual costs and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rentalvehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for awarranty repair. Taxi reimbursement may also beavailable if you meet the eligibility for a courtesyrental and a rental vehicle is not practical for yourrequirements. Rental and taxi reimbursement willbe limited (contact your dealer) and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreement andmeet state/provincial, local and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible forfuel usage charges and may also be responsible fortaxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage orrental usage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.


Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.Cadillac and General Motors of Canada reservethe right to unilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportation at any timeand to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at their sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver controlthe vehicle in difficult driving situations.

Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored only in acrash event by computer systems, such as thosecommonly called event data recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theAirbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, and lateralacceleration, is also recorded. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.


To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with the consent ofthe lessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:• use the data for GM research needs,• make it available for research where

appropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, pleasecheck the OnStar® subscription service agreementor manual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintainyour GM New Vehicle Warranty.


Recycled original equipment parts may alsobe used for repair. These parts are typicallyremoved from vehicles that were total losses inprior accidents. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sections ofthe vehicle. A recycled original equipmentGM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintainyour vehicle’s originally designed appearanceand safety performance, however, the historyof these parts is not known. Such parts arenot covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures are notcovered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GMand may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, and maynot perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is not available fromyour current insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.


If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in an accident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make sure thatno one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideService on page 541 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.


• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.In some states with “no fault” insurance laws, areport may not be necessary. This is especiallytrue if there are no injuries and both vehiclesare driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facilitythat any required replacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but youmust live with the repair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurance company may initiallyvalue the repair using aftermarket parts. Discussthis with your repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.


If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaPlace de Ville Tower C330 Sparks StreetOttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5


Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainlyhope you will notify us. Please call us at1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000.Or, write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments,and specifications for GM transmissions,transaxles, and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.


In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GM dealeror by calling 1-800-GMDRIVE (1-800-463-7483).This reference number is needed to order theservice bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner’smanual will include the Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for currentand past model GM vehicles. To request anorder form, please specify year and modelname of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed pricesare quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residentsare to make checks payable in U.S. funds.


AAccessories and Modifications ...................... 393Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................... 210Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ...................................................... 105Additives, Fuel ............................................. 396Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................ 502Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............. 141Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine .............................. 408Air Conditioning ............................................ 212Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 225Readiness Light ........................................ 224

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 547

Airbag System ............................................... 89Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 105How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 98Passenger Sensing System ....................... 100Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 104What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 97What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? .................................................. 98

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 95Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 92

All-Wheel Drive ............................................ 438All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ..................... 328Analog Clock ................................................ 211Antenna, Rear Side Window ........................ 315Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ..................................................... 316Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 323Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ........ 229Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 498Care of Safety Belts ................................. 496Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 500Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............... 497Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ........... 492Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 494Finish Care ............................................... 497Finish Damage .......................................... 500Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................ 495Leather ..................................................... 495Sheet Metal Damage ................................ 499Speaker Covers ........................................ 496


Appearance Care (cont.)Tires ......................................................... 499Underbody Maintenance ............................ 500Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ........... 501Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 496Weatherstrips ............................................ 496Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ......................................... 498Wood Panels ............................................ 496

Ashtray(s) ..................................................... 211Assist Handles ............................................. 171Audio System(s) ........................................... 265

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 313Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............. 315Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 315Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 316Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual .................................................. 299Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 268Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 310Rear Side Window Antenna ...................... 315Setting the Time ....................................... 267Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 312Understanding Radio Reception ................ 314XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 316

Automatic Headlamp System ........................ 203Automatic Transmission

Fluid ......................................................... 411Operation .................................................. 142

Autoride® ..................................................... 374

BBattery ......................................................... 433

Run-Down Protection ................................ 205Before Leaving on a Long Trip ..................... 356Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ............................... 19Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 323Emergencies ............................................. 325Parking ..................................................... 149System Warning Light ............................... 228

Brake Pedal, Throttle .................................... 141Brakes ......................................................... 429Braking ........................................................ 322Braking in Emergencies ................................ 325Break-In, New Vehicle .................................. 137Bucket Seats, Rear ........................................ 26


Bulb Replacement ........................................ 445Back-Up Lamps ........................................ 445Headlamp Aiming ...................................... 441High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 445License Plate Lamps ................................. 447Replacement Bulbs ................................... 447

Buying New Tires ......................................... 465

CCalibration ............................................ 155, 157California Fuel .............................................. 396California Proposition 65 Warning ................. 393Canadian Owners ............................................ 3Capacities and Specifications ....................... 512Carbon Monoxide ................. 124, 126, 153, 375Care of

Safety Belts .............................................. 496Your CD and DVD Player ......................... 315Your CDs and DVDs ................................. 315

Cargo Cover ................................................ 174Cargo Management System ......................... 176Center Console Storage Area ....................... 171Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ................................................ 52Center Seat ................................................... 18

Chains, Tire ................................................. 471Charging System Light ................................. 227Check

Engine Light ............................................. 232Checking Things Under the Hood ................. 400Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 500Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 67Infants and Young Children ......................... 63Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 73Older Children ............................................ 60Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 82Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Front Seat Position .................................. 84Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 85Where to Put the Restraint ......................... 72

Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 316Cigarette Lighter ........................................... 211Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 498Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............................. 497Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 494Finish Care ............................................... 497Inside of Your Vehicle ............................... 492


Cleaning (cont.)Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................ 495Leather ..................................................... 495Speaker Covers ........................................ 496Tires ......................................................... 499Underbody Maintenance ............................ 500Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 496Weatherstrips ............................................ 496Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ......................................... 498Wood Panels ............................................ 496

Climate Control SystemDual Automatic .......................................... 212Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 217Rear Air Conditioning and Heating

System, Electronic ................................. 218Clock ........................................................... 211Collision Damage Repair .............................. 548Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt .................. 56Compass .............................................. 155, 157Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 133Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 322Convenience Net .......................................... 173

CoolantEngine Temperature Gage ........................ 230Heater, Engine .......................................... 141Surge Tank Pressure Cap ......................... 418

Cooled Seats ................................................. 12Cooling System ............................................ 422Cruise Control .............................................. 194Cruise Control Light ..................................... 237Cupholder(s) ................................................ 170Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ............................ 545Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users .......................................... 539Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 540Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 536GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ....... 541Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors ................................................... 553Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ........................... 552Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 552Roadside Service ...................................... 541Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................ 553


DDaytime Running Lamps .............................. 202Defensive Driving ......................................... 318Delayed Locking ........................................... 122Differential, Locking ...................................... 325Doing Your Own Service Work ..................... 394Dome Lamp Override ................................... 205Dome Lamps ............................................... 204Door

Delayed Locking ....................................... 122Locks ........................................................ 120Power Door Locks .................................... 121Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 122Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 122

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 43

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................... 239DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 240DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 254DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 245

DrivingAt Night .................................................... 350City ........................................................... 354Defensive .................................................. 318

Driving (cont.)Drunken .................................................... 319Freeway .................................................... 355Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 358In Rain and on Wet Roads ....................... 351Off-Road ................................................... 334Recovery Hooks ....................................... 365Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ........... 364Winter ....................................................... 360

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ........ 212DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System .............. 299

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment .................................... 502Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 506Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 503Instrument Panel Fuse Block .................... 504Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 503Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 507Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 503


EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ....................................... 408Battery ...................................................... 433Check and Service Engine Soon Light ...... 232Coolant ..................................................... 415Coolant Heater .......................................... 141Coolant Temperature Gage ....................... 230Drive Belt Routing ..................................... 530Engine Compartment Overview ................. 402Exhaust .................................................... 153Fan Noise ................................................. 427Oil ............................................................ 403Oil Life System ......................................... 406Overheated Protection Operating Mode ..... 421Overheating .............................................. 418Starting ..................................................... 139

Entry Lighting ............................................... 205Event Data Recorders (EDR) ....................... 547Exit Lighting ................................................. 205Extender, Safety Belt ...................................... 59Exterior Lamps ............................................. 197

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner .................................... 408Finish Damage ............................................. 500Flashers, Hazard Warning ............................ 186Flat Tire ....................................................... 472Flat Tire, Changing ....................................... 473Flat Tire, Storing .......................................... 488Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................. 411Power Steering ......................................... 427Windshield Washer ................................... 428

Fog Lamp Light ............................................ 237Fog Lamps ................................................... 204Front Axle .................................................... 440Fuel ............................................................. 395

Additives ................................................... 396California Fuel .......................................... 396Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 400Filling Your Tank ....................................... 398Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 397Gage ........................................................ 238Gasoline Octane ....................................... 395Gasoline Specifications ............................. 395Low Warning Light .................................... 239


FusesCenter Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 506Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 503Instrument Panel Fuse Block .................... 504Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 507Windshield Wiper ...................................... 503

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ..................... 230Fuel .......................................................... 238Speedometer ............................................ 222Tachometer ............................................... 222

Garage Door Opener ................................... 165Garment Hooks ............................................ 171Gasoline

Octane ...................................................... 395Specifications ............................................ 395

Glove Box .................................................... 170GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........... 541

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................. 186Head Restraints ............................................. 17Headlamp

Aiming ...................................................... 441Headlamps

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 203Bulb Replacement ..................................... 445Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 202High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 445High/Low Beam Changer .......................... 189On Reminder ............................................ 202

Heated Seats ........................................... 11, 12Heated Steering Wheel ................................ 187Heater .......................................................... 212Highbeam On Light ...................................... 237High-Speed Operation, Tires ......................... 458Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 357Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 358Hood

Checking Things Under ............................. 400Release .................................................... 401

Horn ............................................................ 186How to Use This Manual ................................. 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 43


IIgnition Positions .......................................... 138Infants and Young Children, Restraints ........... 63Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 456Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 184Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................. 204Cluster ...................................................... 221

JJump Starting ............................................... 434

KKeyless Entry System .................................. 112Keys ............................................................ 111

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 451Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection .................... 205Dome ....................................................... 204Dome Lamp Override ................................ 205

Lamps (cont.)Exterior ..................................................... 197Fog ........................................................... 204Reading .................................................... 205

LATCH SystemChild Restraints .......................................... 73

License Plate Lamps .................................... 447Liftgate, Power ............................................. 126Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................ 124Liftglass/Liftgate ............................................ 124Light

Airbag Readiness ...................................... 224Anti-Lock Brake System Warning .............. 229Brake System Warning ............................. 228Charging System ...................................... 227Cruise Control ........................................... 237Fog Lamp ................................................. 237Highbeam On ........................................... 237Lights On Reminder .................................. 237Low Fuel Warning ..................................... 239Malfunction Indicator ................................. 232Oil Pressure .............................................. 236Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 225Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ............... 223Safety Belt Reminder ................................ 223Security .................................................... 236StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................. 230


Light (cont.)Tire Pressure ............................................ 231Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 238

LightingEntry ......................................................... 205Exit ........................................................... 205

Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 366Locking Differential ....................................... 325Lockout Protection ........................................ 123Locks

Delayed Locking ....................................... 122Door ......................................................... 120Lockout Protection .................................... 123Power Door .............................................. 121Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 122Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 122

Loss of Control ............................................ 333Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 239Luggage Carrier ........................................... 172Lumbar

Power Controls ........................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ..................... 519At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 523At Least Once a Month ............................ 524At Least Once a Year ............................... 524Introduction ............................................... 514Maintenance Footnotes ............................. 521Maintenance Record ................................. 531Maintenance Requirements ....................... 514Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 529Owner Checks and Services ..................... 523Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 527Scheduled Maintenance ............................ 517Using ........................................................ 515Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 514

Malfunction Indicator Light ............................ 232Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................. 13Message

DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 245


MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Mirror with

Intellibeam™, OnStar®, Compass, andTemperature Display .............................. 155

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay .................................................. 157

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 160MyGMLink.com ............................................. 539

NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ..................................................... 299New Vehicle Break-In ................................... 137Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 529

OOdometer ..................................................... 222Odometer, Trip ............................................. 222Off-Road Driving ........................................... 334Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 331Oil

Engine ...................................................... 403Pressure Light .......................................... 236

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .......................... 406Older Children, Restraints .............................. 60Online Owner Center ................................... 539OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ......... 163Other Warning Devices ................................ 186Outlet Adjustment ......................................... 217Outlet(s), Accessory Power ........................... 210Outside

Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................ 160Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ........................................ 421Owner Checks and Services ........................ 523Owners, Canadian ........................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................. 500Park Aid ....................................................... 206Park (P)

Shifting Into .............................................. 150Shifting Out of .......................................... 151

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 206Brake ........................................................ 149Over Things That Burn ............................. 152

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ................ 225


Passenger Sensing System .......................... 100Passing ........................................................ 331PASS-Key® III+ ............................................ 135PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................ 135Power

Accessory Outlet(s) ................................... 210Door Locks ............................................... 121Electrical System ...................................... 503Liftgate ..................................................... 126Lumbar Controls ......................................... 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 15Retained Accessory (RAP) ........................ 139Running Boards ........................................ 130Seat ............................................................. 9Steering Fluid ........................................... 427Windows ................................................... 132

Pretensioners, Safety Belt .............................. 59Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........... 122

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 42

RRadios ......................................................... 265

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............. 315Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 315Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual .................................................. 299Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 268Rear Seat Audio ....................................... 310Setting the Time ....................................... 267Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 312Understanding Reception .......................... 314

Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................. 191Reading Lamps ............................................ 205Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

and Electronic Climate Controls ................ 218Rear Axle ..................................................... 439Rear Door Security Locks ............................ 122Rear Heated Seats ........................................ 18Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 56Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 173Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 310Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 299


Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts ............... 53Rear Side Window Antenna .......................... 315Rear Storage Area ....................................... 173Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 193Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ..................................................... 157

Reclining Seatbacks, Power ........................... 15Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........... 527Recovery Hooks ........................................... 365Recreational Vehicle Towing ......................... 372Remote Keyless Entry System ..................... 112Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation .... 113Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................. 478Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............. 474Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 447Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .............................. 552General Motors ......................................... 553United States Government ........................ 552

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................ 106Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................. 107Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................. 139

Right Front Passenger Position,Safety Belts ................................................ 51

Road Sensing Suspension ............................ 325Roadside

Service ..................................................... 541Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ............... 364Routing, Engine Drive Belt ........................... 530Running Boards, Power ................................ 130Running the Engine While Parked ................ 154

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ........................ 223Pretensioners .............................................. 59Reminder Light ......................................... 223

Safety BeltsCare of ..................................................... 496Center Front Passenger Position ................. 52Driver Position ............................................ 43How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 43Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 42Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 56Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 53Right Front Passenger Position ................... 51


Safety Belts (cont.)Safety Belt Extender ................................... 59Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 51Safety Belts Are for Everyone ..................... 38Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ..................... 50

Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 517Seats

60/40 Split Bench Seat ............................... 19Bucket Seats, Rear ..................................... 26Center Seat ................................................ 18Head Restraints .......................................... 17Heated and Cooled Seats ........................... 12Heated Seats .............................................. 11Heated Seats - Rear .................................. 18Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ....................... 13Power Lumbar ............................................ 10Power Reclining Seatbacks ......................... 15Power Seats ................................................. 9Third Row Seat .......................................... 33

Secondary Latch System .............................. 484Securing a Child Restraint

Center Front Seat Position .......................... 84Rear Seat Position ...................................... 82Right Front Seat Position ............................ 85

Security Light ............................................... 236

Service ......................................................... 392Accessories and Modifications ................... 393Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle .................................................. 395California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 393Doing Your Own Work .............................. 394Engine Soon Light .................................... 232Publications Ordering Information .............. 553

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........ 104Setting the Time ........................................... 267Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 499Shifting Into Park (P) .................................... 150Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................ 151Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ......................... 50Signals, Turn and Lane-Change ................... 188Spare Tire .................................................... 492

Installing ................................................... 478Removing ................................................. 474Storing ...................................................... 488

Specifications, Capacities ............................. 512Speedometer ................................................ 222Split Bench Seat (60/40) ................................ 19StabiliTrak® System ...................................... 326StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ............................ 230Starting Your Engine .................................... 139Steering ....................................................... 329


Steering Wheel Controls, Audio .................... 313Steering Wheel, Heated ............................... 187Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ........................... 187Storage

Garment Hooks ......................................... 171Storage Areas

Cargo Management System ...................... 176Center Console Storage Area ................... 171Convenience Net ...................................... 173Cupholder(s) ............................................. 170Glove Box ................................................. 170Luggage Carrier ........................................ 172Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 173Rear Storage Area .................................... 173

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ................ 364Sun Visors ................................................... 133Sunroof ........................................................ 179

TTachometer .................................................. 222Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................. 312Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................... 133

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 133PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 135PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 135

Third Row Seat .............................................. 33Throttle, Adjustable ....................................... 141Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 187Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 231Tires ............................................................ 450

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ................................................ 498

Buying New Tires ...................................... 465Chains ...................................................... 471Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 473Cleaning ................................................... 499Different Size ............................................ 467High-Speed Operation ............................... 458If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 472Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 456Inspection and Rotation ............................ 463Installing the Spare Tire ............................ 478Pressure Monitor System .......................... 458Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 478Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 474Secondary Latch System .......................... 484Spare Tire ................................................. 492Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 488Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 451Tire Terminology and Definitions ................ 453


Tires (cont.)Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 468Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 469Wheel Replacement .................................. 470When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 465

Tow/Haul Mode ............................................ 148Tow/Haul Mode Light .................................... 238Towing

Recreational Vehicle .................................. 372Towing a Trailer ........................................ 375Your Vehicle .............................................. 372

TractionLocking Differential .................................... 325Road Sensing Suspension ........................ 325StabiliTrak® System .................................. 326

TrailerRecommendations ..................................... 388

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................ 411

Transmission Operation, Automatic ............... 142Trip Odometer .............................................. 222Turn and Lane-Change Signals .................... 188Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ..................... 188

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ......... 206Understanding Radio Reception .................... 314Uniform Tire Quality Grading ........................ 468Universal Home Remote System .................. 165

Operation .................................................. 166

VVehicle

Control ...................................................... 322Damage Warnings ........................................ 5Loading ..................................................... 366Symbols ....................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC .......................... 254Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders ................................................. 547Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ........................................... 502Service Parts Identification Label .............. 502

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 217Visors ........................................................... 133


WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators .......... 220Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 245Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 186Other Warning Devices ............................. 186Safety and Symbols ...................................... 4Vehicle Damage ........................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ...................... 469Different Size ............................................ 467Replacement ............................................. 470

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 72Windows ...................................................... 131

Power ....................................................... 132

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .... 498Rainsense™ II Wipers .............................. 191Washer ..................................................... 192Washer Fluid ............................................ 428Wiper Blade Replacement ......................... 448Wiper Fuses ............................................. 503Wipers ...................................................... 190

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper .................... 193Winter Driving .............................................. 360

XXM Radio Messages .................................... 297XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .......... 316

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ................ 514


2007 cadillac escalade/escalade esv owner manual...

Documents